Emotron FDU 2.0 Variable Speed Drive

Emotron FDU 2.0 

Variable Speed Drive 

Instruction manual 

English 

Software version 4.2X

Addendum 

Addendum valid for 

Emotron VFX 2.0 and FDU 2.0 Variable Speed Drive 

New Software version 4.21 

This addendum belongs to the instruction manuals with document number: 

01-4428-01r2 for Emotron FDU 2.0 software version 4.2X and 

01-4429-01r2 for Emotron VFX 2.0 software version 4.2X 

All Chapter and Menu numbers in this addendum refers to 

the Chapter and Menu numbers in the above listed Instruction manuals. 

1. Brake acknowledge functionality 

Support is added for a Brake Acknowledge signal via a 

digital input. It is monitored using a brake fault time parameter. 

Additional output and trip/warning signals are also 

included. The acknowledge signal is either connected from 

the brake contactor or from a proximity switch on the brake. 

The brake acknowledge signal can also be used to improve 

safety by preventing hoist falling load in case the brake is not 

engaged when stopping. 

Brake not released - Brake Fault trip 

During start and running the brake acknowledge signal is 

compared to the actual brake output signal and if no 

acknowledge, i.e. brake not released, while brake output is 

high for the Brake Fault time [33H], then a Brake trip is 

generated. 

Brake not engaged - Brake Warning 

and continued operation 

(keep torque) 

The brake acknowledge signal is compared to the actual 

brake output signal at stop. If acknowledge is still active, i.e. 

brake not engaged, while brake output is low for the Brake 

Engage time [33E] then a Brake warning is generated and 

the torque is kept, i.e. prolonging normal brake engage 

mode, until brake closes or an emergency action is needed 

by the operator, such as setting down the load. 

Following chapters have added 

parameters or selections 

11.5.2 Digital inputs 

The Brake acknowledge function is activated by using the 

new digital input selection- Brk Ackn in Menu [521] 

Digital Input 1 [521] 

Default: RunL 

Off 0 The input is not active. 

Brk Ackn 31 

521 DigIn 1 

Stp Brk Ackn 

A 

Brake acknowledge input for Brake Fault 

control. Function is activated via this 

selection 

Emotron AB 01-4934-01r1 Brake acknowledge functionality 1

Addendum 

11.3.4. Mechanical brake control 

The “Brake Fault trip time” for “Brake not released” function 

is specified by the new parameter “33H Brk Fault”. 

Brake Fault trip time [33H]’ 

Default: 1.00s 

Range 0.00 - 5.00s 

33H Brk Fault 

Stp 1.00s 

A 

Note! The Brake Fault trip time should be set to longer 

time than the Brake release time[33C]. 

The “Brake not engaged” warning is using the setting of 

parameter “Brake Engaged time [33E]”. 

Following Figure shows principle of brake operation for 

fault during run (left) and during stop (right). 

Start 

Brake 

release time 

33C 

Brake 

release time 

33C 

Brake wait 

time 

33F 

Brake engage 

time 

33E 

Running 

Torque 

Speed>0 

Brake relay 

Brake acknowledge 

Brake Trip 

Brake warning 

Addendum 

11.5.4 Digital Outputs [540] 

and 11.5.5 Relays [550] 

The brake trip/warning is signalled on digital/relay outputs 

via new selections in Menus Digital Out 1-2 [541] - [542] 

and Menu Relay 1 to 3 [551] - [55C] 

Digital Out 1 to 2 [541] - [542] 

Default 

Brk Fault 

BrkNotEngage 

11.7.2 Status [720] 

The brake trip/warning is signalled as “Brake” in Menu 

Warning[722] and Trip message log [810]. 

Warning [722]. 

Ready 

88 Tripped on brake fault (not released) 

89 

... ... 

Warning and continued operation (keep 

torque) due to Brake not engaged during 

stop. 

14 Brake 

... ... 

541 DigOut 1 

Stp Brk Fault 

A 

722 Warnings 

Stp Brake 

12.1 Trips, warnings and limits 

New trip/warning message, “Brake” added 

Trip/Warning 

messages 

Selections 

Trip 

(Normal/ 

Soft) 

... ... ... ... 

Brake Via DigIn Normal 

... ... ... ... 

12.2 Trip conditions, causes and 

remedial action 

New trip/warning message “Brake” added. 

Trip 

condition 

Possible 

Cause 

.... ... ... 

Brake 

Drive tripped 

on brake fault 

(not released) 

or Brake not 

engaged 

warning 

during stop 

... ... ... 

Remedy 

Warning 

indicators 

(Area D) 

- Check Brake acknowledge 

signal wiring to selected digital 

input. 

- Check programming of digital 

input DigIn 1-8, [520]. 

- Check circuit breaker feeding 

mechanical brake circuit. 

- Check mechanical brake if 

acknowledge signal is wired from 

brake limit switch. 

- Check brake contactor. 

11.2.7 Trip Auto reset/Trip conditions 

[250] 

The brake trip auto reset is activated and delay time is specified 

by the new parameter in Menu Brake Fault [25V]. 

Brake Fault [25V] 

Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip. 

Default Off 

25V Brk Fault 

Stp Off 

A 

Off 0 Autoreset not activated. 

1 - 3600s 1 - 3600s Brake fault auto reset delay time. 

Emotron AB 01-4934-01r1 Brake acknowledge functionality 3

Addendum 

2. Other changes 

In following chapters there are added functionality or 

revised selections or default value. 

10.4 Start and stop commands 

Added Note (this note is also valid for Fieldbus option 

manual) due to revised function. Earlier RunL + RunR via 

serial communication resulted in stop. This is now changed 

to activate Bipolar mode where the sign of the reference 

value (with Modbus No. 42905) will give the direction. 

Note! Bipolar mode is activated if both RunR and RunL is 

active. 

10.5 Reference signal 

Added Note for reference signal with Modbus number 

42905. 

Note! In Bipolar mode, then -4000... 4000h corresponds 

to -100%...100% of actual reference value range. 

11.2.4 Motor Data [220] 

Selection “Advanced” added to menu [22A] for activation of 

switching frequency functions (Only valid for Emotron 

FDU 2.0) 

Motor Sound [22A] 

Default: 

Advanced 4 

22A Motor Sound 

Stp Advanced 

A 

F 

Switching frequency and PWM mode setup 

via [22E] 

New menus for advanced setup of motor modulation properties 

(Only valid for Emotron FDU 2.0): 

Motor PWM [22E] 

New menu (PWM = Pulse Width Modulation). 

PWM Fswitch [22E1] 

Set the PWM switching frequency of the VSD 

Default: 

Range 

Resolution 

3.00 kHz 

Communication information 

PWM Mode [22E2] 

1.50 - 6.00kHz 

0.01kHz 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43053 

Profibus slot/index 168/212 

Fieldbus format 

Modbus format 

Default: Standard 

Standard 0 Standard 

Sine Filt 1 

22E1 PWM Fswitch 

Stp 3.00kHz 

A 

22E2 PWM Mode 

Stp Standard 

A 

Long, 1=1Hz 

EInt 

Sine Filter mode for use with output Sine 

Filters 





Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

4 Other changes Emotron AB 01-4934-01r1

Addendum 

PWM Random [22E3] 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Random modulation is Off. 

On 1 


11.3.5 Speed [340] 

Revised selections for menu [343]. 

Random modulation is active. Random frequency 

variation range is ± 1/8 of level set 

in [E22E1]. 




Modbus format 

22E3 PWM Random 

Stp Off 

A 

UInt 

UInt 

Maximum speed [343] 

Sets the maximum speed. The maximum speed will operate 

as an absolute maximum limit. This parameter is used to 

prevent damage due to high speed. The synchronous speed 

(Sync Speed) is determined by the motor speed [225]. 

Keyboard reference Mode[369] 

Changed default value from Normal to MotPot 

Default: 

Normal 0 .... 

MotPot 1 .... 

Mot Pot 

11.5.3 Analogue Outputs [530] 

Added selections in Menu [531] and [534] 

AnOut1 Function [531] and AnOut 2 Function 

[534] 

Added selections Speed Ref and Torque Ref 

Default: Speed 

Speed Ref 14 

Torque Ref 15 

369 Key Ref Mode 

StpA 

MotPot 

531 AnOut 1 FC 

StpA 

Speed 

Actual internal speed reference Value 

after ramp and V/Hz. 

Actual torque reference value 

(=0 in V/Hz mode) 

Default: 

Sync Speed 0 

343 Max Speed 

StpA 

Sync Speed 

Sync Speed 

Synchronous speed, i.e. no load 

speed, at nominal frequency. 

1-24000rpm 1- 24000 Min Speed - 4 x Motor Sync Speed 





Modbus format 

Int, 1=1 rpm 

UInt 

Note: Maximum speed [343] has priority over Min Speed 

[341], i.e. if [343] is set below [341] then the drive will 

run at [343] Max Speed with acceleration times given by 

[335] and [336] respectively. 

11.3.7 Preset References [360] 

New default value in Menu [369] 

Emotron AB 01-4934-01r1 Other changes 5

Addendum 

14. Technical Data 

14.1 Electrical specifications related 

to model 

New models for VFX2.0 and FDU2.0 with 480V rated 

voltage. The 228 Amp unit is the largest unit in frame size F 

available with UL approval 

Model 

Max. 

output 

current 

[A] * 

Normal duty 

(120%, 1 min every 10 min) 

Power@ 

400 V 

[kW] 

Power@ 

460 V 

[hp] 

Rated 

current 

[A] 

Heavy duty 


Power@ 

400 V 

[kW] 

Power@ 

460 V 

[hp] 

Rated 

current 

[A] 

Frame size 

FDU/VFX 48-228 300 110 200 228 90 150 182 F 

* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by 

drive temperature. 

Emotron AB 01-4934-01r1 2009-10-30 

Emotron AB, Mörsaregatan 12, SE-250 24 Helsingborg, Tel: +46 42 16 99 00, Fax: +46 42 16 99 49 

www.emotron.com

Emotron FDU 2.0 

INSTRUCTION MANUAL - ENGLISH 

Software version 4.2x 

Document number: 01-4428-01 

Edition: r2 

Date of release: 10-06-2009 

© Copyright Emotron AB 2005 - 2009 

Emotron retains the right to change specifications and illustrations in the 

text, without prior notification. The contents of this document may not 

be copied without the explicit permission of Emotron AB.

Safety Instructions 

Instruction manual 

Read this instruction manual before using the Variable 

Speed Drive, VSD. 

Handling the variable speed drive 

Installation, commissioning, demounting, taking measurements, 

etc, of or on the variable speed drive may only be carried 

out by personnel technically qualified for the task. The 

installation must be carried out in accordance with local 

standards. 

Opening the variable speed drive 

WARNING: Always switch off the mains voltage 

before opening the variable speed drive and 

wait at least 5 minutes to allow the buffer 

capacitors to discharge. 

Always take adequate precautions before opening the variable 

speed drive. Although the connections for the control 

signals and the switches are isolated from the main voltage, 

do not touch the control board when the variable speed 

drive is switched on. 

Precautions to be taken with a 

connected motor 

If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the 

driven machine, the mains voltage must always be disconnected 

from the variable speed drive first. Wait at least 5 

minutes before starting work. 

Earthing 

The variable speed drive must always be earthed via the 

mains safety earth connection. 

Earth leakage current 

This variable speed drive has an earth leakage current which 

does exceed 3.5 mA AC. Therefore the minimum size of the 

protective earth conductor must comply with the local safety 

regulations for high leakage current equipment which means 

that according the standard IEC61800-5-1 the protective 

earth connection must be assured by one of following conditions: 

1. Use a protective conductor with a cable cross-section of 

at least 10 mm 2 for copper (Cu) or 16 mm 2 for aluminium 

(Al). 

2. Use an additional PE wire, with the same cable cross-section 

as the used original PE and mains supply wiring. 

Residual current device (RCD) 

compatibility 

This product cause a DC current in the protective conductor. 

Where a residual current device (RCD) is used for protection 

in case of direct or indirect contact, only a Type B 

RCD is allowed on the supply side of this product. Use 

RCD of 300 mA minimum. 

EMC Regulations 

In order to comply with the EMC Directive, it is absolutely 

necessary to follow the installation instructions. All installation 

descriptions in this manual follow the EMC Directive. 

Mains voltage selection 

The variable speed drive may be ordered for use with the 

mains voltage range listed below. 

FDU40/48: 230-480 V 

FDU50/52: 440-525 V 

FDU69: 500-690 V 

Voltage tests (Megger) 

Do not carry out voltage tests (Megger) on the motor, before 

all the motor cables have been disconnected from the variable 

speed drive. 

Condensation 

If the variable speed drive is moved from a cold (storage) 

room to a room where it will be installed, condensation can 

occur. This can result in sensitive components becoming 

damp. Do not connect the mains voltage until all visible 

dampness has evaporated. 

Incorrect connection 

The variable speed drive is not protected against incorrect 

connection of the mains voltage, and in particular against 

connection of the mains voltage to the motor outlets U, V 

and W. The variable speed drive can be damaged in this way. 

Power factor capacitors for improving 

cosϕ 

Remove all capacitors from the motor and the motor outlet. 

Precautions during Autoreset 

When the automatic reset is active, the motor will restart 

automatically provided that the cause of the trip has been 

removed. If necessary take the appropriate precautions. 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 1

Transport 

To avoid damage, keep the variable speed drive in its original 

packaging during transport. This packaging is specially 

designed to absorb shocks during transport. 

IT Mains supply 

The variable speed drives can be modified for an IT mains 

supply, (non-earthed neutral), please contact your supplier 

for details. 

Heat warning 

Be aware of specific parts on the VSD having 

high temperature. 

DC-link residual voltage 

WARNING: After switching off the mains 

supply, dangerous voltage can still be 

present in the VSD. When opening the VSD 

for installing and/or commissioning 

activities wait at least 5 minutes. In case of malfunction 

a qualified technician should check the DC-link or wait 

for one hour before dismantling the VSD for repair. 

2 Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

Contents 

Safety Instructions ......................................... 1 

Contents.......................................................... 3 

1. Introduction..................................................... 5 

1.1 Delivery and unpacking ............................................ 5 

1.2 Using of the instruction manual............................... 5 

1.3 Type code number..................................................... 5 

1.4 Standards .................................................................. 6 

1.4.1 Product standard for EMC ........................................ 6 

1.5 Dismantling and scrapping....................................... 7 

1.5.1 Disposal of old electrical and electronic equipment .. 

7 

1.6 Glossary ..................................................................... 8 

1.6.1 Abbreviations and symbols....................................... 8 

1.6.2 Definitions.................................................................. 8 

2. Mounting ......................................................... 9 

2.1 Lifting instructions..................................................... 9 

2.2 Stand-alone units.................................................... 10 

2.2.1 Cooling ..................................................................... 10 

2.2.2 Mounting schemes.................................................. 11 

2.3 Cabinet mounting.................................................... 13 

2.3.1 Cooling ..................................................................... 13 

2.3.2 Mounting schemes.................................................. 13 

3. Installation ................................................... 15 

3.1 Before installation................................................... 15 

3.2 Cable connections for 003 to 073......................... 15 

3.2.1 Mains cables ........................................................... 15 

3.2.2 Motor cables............................................................ 16 

3.3 Connect motor and mains cables for 090 to 1500.... 

18 

3.4 Cable specifications................................................ 19 

3.5 Stripping lengths ..................................................... 19 

3.5.1 Dimension of cables and fuses.............................. 19 

3.5.2 Tightening torque for mains and motor cables..... 19 

3.6 Thermal protection on the motor ........................... 20 

3.7 Motors in parallel .................................................... 20 

4. Control Connections.................................... 21 

4.1 Control board........................................................... 21 

4.2 Terminal connections ............................................. 22 

4.3 Inputs configuration 

with the switches..................................................... 22 

4.4 Connection example ............................................... 23 

4.5 Connecting the Control Signals.............................. 24 

4.5.1 Cables ...................................................................... 24 

4.5.2 Types of control signals .......................................... 25 

4.5.3 Screening................................................................. 25 

4.5.4 Single-ended or double-ended connection? ......... 25 

4.5.5 Current signals ((0)4-20 mA).................................. 26 

4.5.6 Twisted cables......................................................... 26 

4.6 Connecting options ................................................. 26 

5. Getting Started............................................. 27 

5.1 Connect the mains and motor cables ................... 27 

5.1.1 Mains cables ........................................................... 27 

5.1.2 Motor cables............................................................ 27 

5.2 Using the function keys .......................................... 27 

5.3 Remote control........................................................ 28 

5.3.1 Connect control cables ........................................... 28 

5.3.2 Switch on the mains ............................................... 28 

5.3.3 Set the Motor Data.................................................. 28 

5.3.4 Run the VSD ............................................................ 28 

5.4 Local control............................................................ 29 

5.4.1 Switch on the mains ............................................... 29 

5.4.2 Select manual control............................................. 29 

5.4.3 Set the Motor Data.................................................. 29 

5.4.4 Enter a Reference Value......................................... 29 

5.4.5 Run the VSD ............................................................ 29 

6. Applications.................................................. 31 

6.1 Application overview ............................................... 31 

6.1.1 Pumps...................................................................... 31 

6.1.2 Fans ......................................................................... 31 

6.1.3 Compressors ........................................................... 32 

6.1.4 Blowers .................................................................... 32 

7. Main Features .............................................. 33 

7.1 Parameter sets........................................................ 33 

7.1.1 One motor and one parameter set ........................ 34 

7.1.2 One motor and two parameter sets....................... 34 

7.1.3 Two motors and two parameter sets..................... 34 

7.1.4 Autoreset at trip ...................................................... 34 

7.1.5 Reference priority.................................................... 34 

7.1.6 Preset references.................................................... 35 

7.2 Remote control functions ....................................... 35 

7.3 Performing an Identification Run........................... 37 

7.4 Using the Control Panel Memory............................ 37 

7.5 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400]......... 38 

7.5.1 Load Monitor [410]................................................. 38 

7.6 Pump function ......................................................... 40 

7.6.1 Introduction ............................................................. 40 

7.6.2 Fixed MASTER ......................................................... 41 

7.6.3 Alternating MASTER ................................................ 41 

7.6.4 Feedback 'Status' input .......................................... 41 

7.6.5 Fail safe operation .................................................. 42 

7.6.6 PID control ............................................................... 43 

7.6.7 Wiring Alternating Master....................................... 44 

7.6.8 Checklist And Tips................................................... 45 

7.6.9 Functional Examples of Start/Stop Transitions .... 46 

8. EMC and Machine Directive........................ 49 

8.1 EMC standards........................................................ 49 

8.2 Stop categories and emergency stop .................... 49 

9. Operation via the Control Panel.................. 51 


9.1 General .................................................................... 51 

9.2 The control panel .................................................... 51 

9.2.1 The display............................................................... 51 

9.2.2 Indications on the display....................................... 52 

9.2.3 LED indicators ......................................................... 52 

9.2.4 Control keys............................................................. 52 

9.2.5 The Toggle and Loc/Rem Key ................................ 52 

9.2.6 Function keys .......................................................... 54 

9.3 The menu structure................................................. 54 

9.3.1 The main menu ....................................................... 54 

9.4 Programming during operation .............................. 55 

9.5 Editing values in a menu ........................................ 55 

9.6 Copy current parameter to all sets ........................ 55 

9.7 Programming example............................................ 56 

10. Serial communication ................................. 57 

10.1 Modbus RTU ............................................................ 57 

10.2 Parameter sets........................................................ 57 

10.3 Motor data ............................................................... 58 

10.4 Start and stop commands...................................... 58 

10.5 Reference signal ..................................................... 58 

10.6 Description of the EInt formats .............................. 58 

11. Functional Description................................ 63 

11.1 Preferred View [100]............................................... 63 

11.1.1 1st Line [110].......................................................... 63 

11.1.2 2nd Line [120] ........................................................ 64 

11.2 Main Setup [200].................................................... 64 

11.2.1 Operation [210]....................................................... 64 

11.2.2 Remote Signal Level/Edge [21A]........................... 67 

11.2.3 Mains supply voltage [21B].................................... 67 

11.2.4 Motor Data [220] .................................................... 67 

11.2.5 Motor Protection [230] ........................................... 71 

11.2.6 Parameter Set Handling [240]............................... 74 

11.2.7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions [250]..................... 76 

11.2.8 Serial Communication [260] .................................. 82 

11.3 Process and Application Parameters [300] .......... 85 

11.3.1 Set/View Reference Value [310] ........................... 85 

11.3.2 Process Settings [320] ........................................... 86 

11.3.3 Start/Stop settings [330] ....................................... 90 

11.3.4 Mechanical brake control....................................... 93 

11.3.5 Speed [340]............................................................. 95 

11.3.6 Torques [350].......................................................... 98 

11.3.7 Preset References [360] ........................................ 99 

11.3.8 PID Process Control [380] .................................... 100 

11.3.9 Pump/Fan Control [390] ...................................... 104 

11.4 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400]....... 110 

11.4.1 Load Monitor [410]............................................... 110 

11.4.2 Process Protection [420]...................................... 114 

11.5 I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]..................... 115 

11.5.1 Analogue Inputs [510] .......................................... 115 

11.5.2 Digital Inputs [520] ............................................... 122 

11.5.3 Analogue Outputs [530] ....................................... 124 

11.5.4 Digital Outputs [540] ............................................ 127 

11.5.5 Relays [550] .......................................................... 129 

11.5.6 Virtual Connections [560]..................................... 130 

11.6 Logical Functions and Timers [600] .................... 131 

11.6.1 Comparators [610] ............................................... 131 

11.6.2 Logic Output Y [620]............................................. 135 

11.6.3 Logic Output Z [630]............................................. 137 

11.6.4 Timer1 [640] ......................................................... 138 

11.6.5 Timer2 [650] ......................................................... 140 

11.7 View Operation/Status [700] ............................... 141 

11.7.1 Operation [710]..................................................... 141 

11.7.2 Status [720] .......................................................... 143 

11.7.3 Stored values [730] .............................................. 146 

11.8 View Trip Log [800] ............................................... 147 

11.8.1 Trip Message log [810]......................................... 147 

11.8.2 Trip Messages [820] - [890] ................................ 148 

11.8.3 Reset Trip Log [8A0] ............................................. 149 

11.9 System Data [900]................................................ 149 

11.9.1 VSD Data [920] ..................................................... 149 

12. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 

151 

12.1 Trips, warnings and limits..................................... 151 

12.2 Trip conditions, causes and remedial action ...... 152 

12.2.1 Technically qualified personnel............................ 152 

12.2.2 Opening the variable speed drive ........................ 152 

12.2.3 Precautions to take with a connected motor ...... 152 

12.2.4 Autoreset Trip ........................................................ 152 

12.3 Maintenance ......................................................... 155 

13. Options........................................................ 157 

13.1 Options for the control panel................................ 157 

13.2 EmoSoftCom.......................................................... 157 

13.3 Brake chopper....................................................... 157 

13.4 I/O Board ............................................................... 159 

13.5 Output coils ........................................................... 159 

13.6 Serial communication and fieldbus..................... 159 

13.7 Standby supply board option................................ 159 

13.8 Safe Stop option.................................................... 159 

13.9 Encoder.................................................................. 161 

13.10 PTC/PT100 ............................................................ 161 

14. Technical Data ........................................... 163 

14.1 Electrical specifications related to model ........... 163 

14.2 General electrical specifications.......................... 167 

14.3 Operation at higher temperatures ....................... 168 

14.4 Operation at higher switching frequency............. 168 

14.5 Dimensions and Weights...................................... 169 

14.6 Environmental conditions..................................... 170 

14.7 Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands.............. 171 

14.7.1 According IEC ratings ............................................ 171 

14.7.2 Fuses and cable dimensions according NEMA ratings 

173 

14.8 Control signals....................................................... 175 

15. Menu List .................................................... 177 

Index ........................................................... 185 


1. Introduction 

FDU is used most commonly to control and protect pump 

and fan applications that put high demands on flow control, 

process uptime and low maintenance costs. It can also be 

used for e.g. compressors and blowers. The used motor control 

method is V/Hz-control. Several options are available, 

listed in chapter 13. page 157, that enable you to customize 

the variable speed drive for your specific needs. 

NOTE: Read this instruction manual carefully before 

starting installation, connection or working with the 

variable speed drive. 

The following symbols can appear in this manual. Always 

read these first before continuing: 

NOTE: Additional information as an aid to avoid 

problems. 

! 

CAUTION: Failure to follow these instructions 

can result in malfunction or damage to the 

variable speed drive. 

WARNING: Failure to follow these instructions 

can result in serious injury to the user in addition 

to serious damage to the variable speed drive. 

HOT SURFACE: Failure to follow these 

instructions can result in injury to the user. 

Users 

This instruction manual is intended for: 

• installation engineers 

• maintenance engineers 

• operators 

• service engineers 

1.1 Delivery and unpacking 

Check for any visible signs of damage. Inform your supplier 

immediately of any damage found. Do not install the variable 

speed drive if damage is found. 

The variable speed drives are delivered with a template for 

positioning the fixing holes on a flat surface. Check that all 

items are present and that the type number is correct. 

1.2 Using of the instruction 

manual 

Within this instruction manual the abbreviation “VSD” is 

used to indicate the complete variable speed drive as a single 

unit. 

Check that the software version number on the first page of 

this manual matches the software version in the variable 

speed drive. 

With help of the index and the contents it is easy to track 

individual functions and to find out how to use and set 

them. 

The Quick Setup Card can be put in a cabinet door, so that 

it is always easy to access in case of an emergency. 

1.3 Type code number 

Fig. 1 gives an example of the type code numbering used on 

all variable speed drives. With this code number the exact 

type of the drive can be determined. This identification will 

be required for type specific information when mounting 

and installing. The code number is located on the product 

label, on the front of the unit. 

FDU48-175-54 C E – – – A – N N N N A N – 

Position number: 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112131415161718 

Fig. 1 

Type code number 

Motors 

The variable speed drive is suitable for use with standard 3- 

phase asynchronous motors. Under certain conditions it is 

possible to use other types of motors. Contact your supplier 

for details. 

Position 

for 003- 

046 

Position 

for 060- 

1500 

1 1 VSD type 

Configuration 

2 2 Supply voltage 

FDU 

VFX 

40/48=400 V 

mains 

50/52=525 V 

mains 

69=690 V mains 

3 3 

Rated current (A) 

continuous 

-003=2.5 A 

- 

-1500=1500 A 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Introduction 5

Position 

for 003- 

046 

4 4 Protection class 

5 5 Control panel 

6 6 EMC option 

7 7 

8 8 

- 9 

Brake chopper 

option 

Stand-by power supply 

option 

Safe stop option 

(Not valid for 

003-046) 

20=IP20 

54=IP54 

–=Blank panel 

C=Standard panel 

E=Standard EMC 

(Category C3) 

F=Extended EMC 

(Category C2) 

I=IT-Net 

–=No chopper 

B=Chopper built in 

D=DC+/- interface 

–=No SBS 

S=SBS included 

–=No safe stop 

T=Safe stop incl. 

(Only 090-1500) 

9 10 Brand label A=Emotron 

10 - 

11 11 

Painted VSD 

(Only valid for 

003-046) 

Coated boards, 

option 

A=Standard paint 

B=White paint 

RAL9010 

A=Standard 

boards 

V=Coated boards 

12 12 Option position 1 N=No option 

13 13 Option position 2 

C=Crane I/O 

E=Encoder 

14 14 Option position 3 

P=PTC/PT100 

I=Extended I/O 

S=Safe Stop (only 

003-046) 

15 15 

Option position, communication 

N=No option 

D=DeviceNet 

P=Profibus 

S=RS232/485 

M=Modbus/TCP 

16 16 Software type A=Standard 

17 17 

18 18 

Position 

for 060- 

1500 

Configuration 

Motor PTC. (Only 

valid for 003-046) 

Gland kit. 

(Only valid for 003- 

046) 

N=No option 

P=PTC 

–=Glands not 

included 

G=Gland kit 

included 

1.4 Standards 

The variable speed drives described in this instruction manual 

comply with the standards listed in Table 1. For the declarations 

of conformity and manufacturer’s certificate, 

contact your supplier for more information or visit 

www.emotron.com. 

1.4.1Product standard for EMC 

Product standard EN(IEC)61800-3, second edition of 2004 

defines the: 

First Environment (Extended EMC) as environment that 

includes domestic premises. It also includes establishments 

directly connected without intermediate transformers to a 

low voltage power supply network that supplies buildings 

used for domestic purposes. 

Category C2: Power Drive System (PDS) of rated voltage

Table 1 

Standards 

European 

All 

USA 

UL and UL 

Market Standard Description 

Machine Directive 

EMC Directive 

Low Voltage Directive 

WEEE Directive 

EN 60204-1 

EN(IEC)61800-3:2004 

EN(IEC)61800-5-1 Ed. 

2.0 

IEC 60721-3-3 

UL508C 

≥90 A only 

UL 840 

98/37/EEC 

2004/108/EEC 

2006/95/EC 

2002/96/EC 

Russian GOST R For all sizes 

Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines 

Part 1: General requirements. 

Machine Directive: Manufacturer’s certificate 

acc. to Appendix IIB 

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems 

Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods. 

EMC Directive: 

Declaration of Conformity and 

CE marking 

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-1. 

Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy. 

Low Voltage Directive: Declaration of Conformity and 

CE marking 

Classification of environmental conditions. Air quality chemical vapours, unit in 

operation. Chemical gases 3C1, Solid particles 3S2. 

Optional with coated boards 

Unit in operation. Chemical gases Class 3C2, Solid particles 3S2. 

UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment 

UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment power conversion equipment. 

Insulation coordination including clearances and creepage distances for electrical 

equipment. 

1.5 Dismantling and scrapping 

The enclosures of the drives are made from recyclable material 

as aluminium, iron and plastic. Each drive contains a 

number of components demanding special treatment, for 

example electrolytic capacitors. The circuit boards contain 

small amounts of tin and lead. Any local or national regulations 

in force for the disposal and recycling of these materials 

must be complied with. 

for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. By 

ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help 

prevent potentially negative consequences for the environment 

and human health, which could otherwise be caused 

by inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling 

of materials will help to conserve natural resources. For 

more detailed information about recycling this product, 

please contact the local distributor of the product or visit our 

home page www.emotron.com. 

1.5.1Disposal of old electrical and 

electronic equipment 

This information is applicable in the European Union and 

other European countries with separate collection systems. 

This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates 

that this product shall be treated according to the WEEE 

Directive. It must be taken to the applicable collection point 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Introduction 7

1.6 Glossary 

1.6.1Abbreviations and symbols 

In this manual the following abbreviations are used: 

1.6.2 Definitions 

In this manual the following definitions for current, torque 

and frequency are used: 

Table 3 

Definitions 

Table 2 

Abbreviations 

Name Description Quantity 

Abbreviation/ 

symbol 

DSP 

VSD 

CP 

EInt 

UInt 

Int 

Long 

 

Description 

Digital signals processor 

Variable speed drive 

Control panel, the programming and presentation 

unit on the VSD 

Communication format 




The function cannot be changed in run mode 

I IN Nominal input current of VSD A RMS 

I NOM Nominal output current of VSD A RMS 

I MOT Nominal motor current A RMS 

P NOM Nominal power of VSD kW 

P MOT Motor power kW 

T NOM Nominal torque of motor Nm 

T MOT Motor torque Nm 

f OUT Output frequency of VSD Hz 

f MOT Nominal frequency of motor Hz 

n MOT Nominal speed of motor rpm 

I CL Maximum output current A RMS 

Speed Actual motor speed rpm 

Torque Actual motor torque Nm 

Sync 

speed 

Synchronous speed of the motor 

rpm 

8 Introduction Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

2. Mounting 

This chapter describes how to mount the VSD. 

Before mounting it is recommended that the installation is 

planned out first. 

• Be sure that the VSD suits the mounting location. 

• The mounting site must support the weight of the VSD. 

• Will the VSD continuously withstand vibrations and/or 

shocks? 

• Consider using a vibration damper. 

• Check ambient conditions, ratings, required cooling air 

flow, compatibility of the motor, etc. 

• Know how the VSD will be lifted and transported. 

Recommended for VSD models -300 to -1500 

Lifting eye 

2.1 Lifting instructions 

Note: To prevent personal risks and any damage to the 

unit during lifting, it is advised that the lifting methods 

described below are used. 

Recommended for VSD models -090 to -250 

Load: 56 to 74 kg 

Fig. 3 

Remove the roof plate. 

Terminals for roof fan 

unit supply cables 

A 

DETAIL A 

Fig. 4 

Remove roof unit 

Fig. 2 Lifting VSD model -090 to -250 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Mounting 9

2.2 Stand-alone units 

The VSD must be mounted in a vertical position against a 

flat surface. Use the template (delivered together with the 

VSD) to mark out the position of the fixing holes. 

Fig. 6 Variable speed drive mounting models 003 to 1500 

2.2.1 Cooling 

Fig. 6 shows the minimum free space required around the 

VSD for the models 003 to 1500 in order to guarantee adequate 

cooling. Because the fans blow the air from the bottom 

to the top it is advisable not to position an air inlet 

immediately above an air outlet. 

The following minimum separation between two variable 

speed drives, or a VSD and a non-dissipating wall must be 

maintained. Valid if free space on opposite side. 

Table 4 

Mounting and cooling 

Fig. 5 Lifting VSD model -300 to -1500 

FDU-FDU 

(mm) 

FDU-wall, 

wall-one 

side 

(mm) 

003-018 026-046 090-250 300-1500 

cabinet 

a 200 200 200 100 

b 200 200 200 0 

c 0 0 0 0 

d 0 0 0 0 

a 100 100 100 100 

b 100 100 100 0 

c 0 0 0 0 

d 0 0 0 0 

NOTE: When a 300 to 1500 model is placed between two 

walls, a minimum distance at each side of 200 mm must 

be maintained. 

10 Mounting Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

2.2.2 Mounting schemes 

128,5 

24,8 

128.5 37 

10 

10 

Ø 13 (2x) 

Ø 

13 (2x) 

512 

492 

416 

396 

202.6 

Ø 

7 (4x) 

Fig. 7 

FDU48/52: Model 003 to 018 (B) 

Glands 

M20 

Gland 

M16 

Ø 7 (4x) 

Glands 

M32 

Gland 

M25 

Fig. 10 FDU48/52: Model 026 to 046 (C) 

178 

292,1 

Fig. 8 

FDU48/52: Model 003 to 018 (B) 

Gland 

M25 (026-031) 

M32 (037-046) 

Glands 

M20 

Glands 

M32 (026-031) 

M40 (037-046) 

Fig. 9 

FDU48/52: Model 003 to 018 (B), with optional 

gland plate 

NOTE: Glands for size B and C available as option kit. 

Fig. 11 Cable interface for mains, motor and communication, 

FDU48/52: Model 026 to 046 (C) 


Ø 7 (4x) 

30 160 

10 

Ø 13 (2x) 

Membrane cable 

gland M60 

22,5 

240 

120 

Ø9(6x) 

284,5 

275 

925 

952,50 

922,50 

570 

590 

Ø16(3) 

10 

30 

314 

220 

Fig. 14 FDU48: Model 090 to 175 (E) including cable interface 

for mains, motor and communication 

Fig. 12 FDU40/50: Model 046 - 073 (X2) 

Glands 

M20 

External 

Interface 

Glands 

M40 

Fig. 13 Cable interface for mains, motor and communication, 

FDU40/50: Model 046 - 073 (X2). 


Table 5 

Flow rates cooling fans 

Cable dimensions 27-66 mm 

Frame FDU Model Flow rate [m 3 /hour] 

J 860 - 1000 

3200 

J69 600 - 650 

22.50 

300 

150 

Ø9(x6) 

344,5 

335 

K 1200 - 1500 

K69 750 - 1000 

4800 

Ø16(3x) 

30 

2.3.2 Mounting schemes 

925 

952,50 

922,50 

10 

NOTE: For the models 860 to 1500 the mentioned 

amount of air flow should be divided equally over the two 

cabinets. 

314 

Fig. 15 FDU48: Model 210 to 250 (F) 

FDU69: Model 90 to 175 (F69) including cable 

interface for mains, motor and communication 

2330 

2.3 Cabinet mounting 

2.3.1 Cooling 

If the variable speed drive is installed in a cabinet, the rate of 

airflow supplied by the cooling fans must be taken into consideration. 

Table 5 

Flow rates cooling fans 

Frame FDU Model Flow rate [m 3 /hour] 

600 

600 

Fig. 16 FDU48: Model 300 to 500 (G and H) 

FDU69: Model 210 to 375 (H69) 

B 003-018 75 

C 026 – 031 120 

C 037 - 046 170 

E 090 - 175 510 

F 210 - 250 

800 

F69 090 - 175 

G 300 - 375 1020 

H 430 - 500 

1600 

H69 210 - 375 

I 600 - 750 

2400 

I69 430 - 500 


2330 

2330 

1000 

600 

1200 

600 

Fig. 17 FDU48: Model 600 to 750 (I) 

FDU69: Model 430 to 500 (I69) 

Fig. 18 FDU48: Model 860 to 1000 (J) 

FDU69: Model 600 to 650 (J69) 

2330 

2000 

Fig. 19 FDU48: Model 1200 to 1500 (K) 

FDU69: Model 750 to 1000 (K69) 

600 


3. Installation 

The description of installation in this chapter complies with 

the EMC standards and the Machine Directive. 

Select cable type and screening according to the EMC 

requirements valid for the environment where the VSD is 

installed. 

3.1 Before installation 

Read the following checklist and think through your application 

before installation. 

• External or internal control. 

• Long motor cables (>100m), refer to section Long motor 

cables. 

• Motors in parallel, refer to menu [213]. 

• Functions. 

• Suitable VSD size in proportion to the motor/application. 

• Mount separately supplied option boards according to 

the instructions in the appropriate option manual. 

If the VSD is temporarily stored before being connected, 

please check the technical data for environmental conditions. 

If the VSD is moved from a cold storage room to the 

room where it is to be installed, condensation can form on 

it. Allow the VSD to become fully acclimatised and wait 

until any visible condensation has evaporated before connecting 

the mains voltage. 

3.2 Cable connections for 003 

to 073 

3.2.1 Mains cables 

Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local 

regulations. The cable must be able to carry the VSD load 

current. 

Recommendations for selecting mains 

cables 

• To fulfil EMC purposes it is not necessary to use 

screened mains cables. 

• Use heat-resistant cables, +60°C or higher. 

• Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with local 

regulations and the nominal current of the motor. See 

table 50, page 171. 

• The litz ground connection see fig. 23, is only necessary 

if the mounting plate is painted. All the variable speed 

drives have an unpainted back side and are therefore 

suitable for mounting on an unpainted mounting plate. 

Connect the mains cables according to fig. 20 or 21. The 

VSD has as standard a built-in RFI mains filter that complies 

with category C3 which suits the Second Environment 

standard. 

PE 

Fig. 20 Mains and motor connections, 003-018 

PE 

Fig. 21 Mains and motor connections, 026-046 

Table 6 

L1,L2,L3 

PE 

U, V, W 

(DC-),DC+,R 

L1 L2 L3 DC- DC+ R 

L1 L2 L3 DC-DC+ R U V W 

Mains and motor connection 

Mains supply, 3 -phase 

Safety earth (protected earth) 

Motor earth 

Motor output, 3-phase 

Brake resistor, DC-link 

connections (optional) 

U V W 

Screen connection 

of motor cables 

Screen connection 

of motor cables 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Installation 15

NOTE: The Brake and DC-link Terminals are only fitted if 

the Brake Chopper Option is built-in. 

WARNING: The Brake Resistor must be 

connected between terminals DC+ and R. 

WARNING: In order to work safely, the mains 

earth must be connected to PE and the 

motor earth to . 

3.2.2 Motor cables 

To comply with the EMC emission standards the variable 

speed drive is provided with a RFI mains filter. The motor 

cables must also be screened and connected on both sides. In 

this way a so-called “Faraday cage” is created around the 

VSD, motor cables and motor. The RFI currents are now 

fed back to their source (the IGBTs) so the system stays 

within the emission levels. 

Recommendations for selecting motor 

cables 

• Use screened cables according to specification in table 7. 

Use symmetrical shielded cable; three phase conductors 

and a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructed 

PE conductor, and a shield. 

• When the conductivity of the cable PE conductor is 

VSD built into cabinet 

Litz 

RFI-Filter 

(option) 

Mains 

Mains 

(L1,L2,L3,PE) 

VSD 

Motor 

Metal coupling 

nut 

Brake resistor 

(option) 

Metal EMC cable glands 

Output coil (option) 

Screened cables 

Unpainted mounting plate 

Metal connector housing 

Motor 

Fig. 23 Variable speed drive in a cabinet on a mounting plate 

Fig. 24 shows an example when there is no metal mounting 

plate used (e.g. if IP54 variable speed drives are used). It is 

important to keep the “circuit” closed, by using metal housing 

and cable glands. 

Connect motor cables 

1. Remove the cable interface plate from the VSD housing. 

2. Put the cables through the glands. 

3. Strip the cable according to Table 8. 

4. Connect the stripped cables to the respective motor terminal. 

5. Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the 

fixing screws. 

6. Tighten the EMC gland with good electrical contact to 

the motor and brake chopper cable screens. 

Placing of motor cables 

Keep the motor cables as far away from other cables as possible, 

especially from control signals. The minimum distance 

between motor cables and control cables is 300 mm. 

Avoid placing the motor cables in parallel with other cables. 

The power cables should cross other cables at an angle of 

90°. 

Long motor cables 

If the connection to the motor is longer than 100 m (40 m 

for models 003-018), it is possible that capacitive current 

peaks will cause tripping at overcurrent. Using output coils 

can prevent this. Contact the supplier for appropriate coils. 

Switching in motor cables 

Switching in the motor connections is not advisable. In the 

event that it cannot be avoided (e.g. emergency or maintenance 

switches) only switch if the current is zero. If this is 

not done, the VSD can trip as a result of current peaks. 

RFI-Filter 

Mains 

VSD 

Metal EMC cable 

glands 


Brake 

resistor 

(option) 

Output 

coils 

(option) 

Metal housing 


Metal cable gland 

Motor 

Mains 

Fig. 24 Variable speed drive as stand alone 


3.3 Connect motor and mains 

cables for 090 to 1500 

VSD model 300 to 1500 

VSD FDU48-090 to 250 and FDU69-090 to 

175 

To simplify the connection of thick motor and mains cables 

to the VSD model FDU48-090 to 250 and FDU69-090 to 

175 the cable interface plate can be removed. 

L1 L2 L3 PE PE U V W 

Clamps for screening 

Cable interface 

Fig. 25 Connecting motor and mains cables 

1. Remove the cable interface plate from the VSD housing. 

2. Put the cables through the glands. 

3. Strip the cable according to Table 8. 

4. Connect the stripped cables to the respective mains/ 

motor terminal. 

5. Fix the clamps on appropriate place and tighten the 

cable in the clamp with good electrical contact to the 

cable screen. 

6. Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the 

fixing screws. 

Fig. 26 Connecting motor and mains cables 

VSD models 300 to 1500 are supplied with Klockner Moeller 

K3x240/4 power clamps. 

For all type of wires to be connected the stripping length 

should be 32 mm. 

18 Installation Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

3.4 Cable specifications 

Table 7 

Cable 

Mains 

Motor 

Control 

Cable specifications 

3.5 Stripping lengths 

Fig. 27 indicates the recommended stripping lengths for 

motor and mains cables. 

Table 8 

Model 

Cable specification 

Power cable suitable for fixed installation for the 

voltage used. 

Symmetrical three conductor cable with concentric 

protection (PE) wire or a four conductor cable 

with compact low-impedance concentric shield 

for the voltage used. 

Control cable with low-impedance shield, 

screened. 

Stripping lengths for mains and motor cables 

Mains cable 

a 

(mm) 

b 

(mm) 

a 

(mm) 

Motor cable 

b 

(mm) 

c 

(mm) 

003-018 90 10 90 10 20 

026–046 150 14 150 14 20 

060–073 130 11 130 11 34 

090-175 160 16 160 16 41 

FDU48-210–250 

FDU69-090-175 

170 24 170 24 46 

3.5.2 Tightening torque for mains 

and motor cables 

Table 9 Model FDU48/52 003 to 046 

Brake chopper 

Mains/motor 

Tightening torque, Nm 1.2-1.4 1.2-1.4 

Table 10 Model FDU40/50 060 to 073 

All cables 60 A 

All cables 73 A 

Tightening torque, Nm 1.5 3.2 

Table 11 Model FDU48 090 to 109 

Brake chopper 

Mains/motor 

Block, mm 2 95 95 

Cable diameter, mm 2 16-95 16-95 

Tightening torque, Nm 14 14 

Table 12 Model FDU48 146 to 175 

Brake chopper 

Mains/motor 

Block, mm 2 95 150 

Cable diameter, mm 2 16-95 35-95 120-150 

Tightening torque, Nm 14 14 24 

Table 13 

Model FDU48 210 to 250 and FDU69 090 to 

175 

Brake chopper 

Mains/motor 

Block, mm 2 150 240 

Cable diameter, mm 2 35-95 120-150 35-70 95-240 

Tightening torque, Nm 14 24 14 24 

Mains 

Motor 

Fig. 27 Stripping lengths for cables 

(06-F45-cables only) 

3.5.1 Dimension of cables and fuses 

Please refer to the chapter Technical data, section 14.7, page 

171. 


3.6 Thermal protection on the 

motor 

Standard motors are normally fitted with an internal fan. 

The cooling capacity of this built-in fan is dependent on the 

frequency of the motor. At low frequency, the cooling capacity 

will be insufficient for nominal loads. Please contact the 

motor supplier for the cooling characteristics of the motor at 

lower frequency. 

WARNING: Depending on the cooling 

characteristics of the motor, the application, 

the speed and the load, it may be necessary 

to use forced cooling on the motor. 

Motor thermistors offer better thermal protection for the 

motor. Depending on the type of motor thermistor fitted, 

the optional PTC input may be used. The motor thermistor 

gives a thermal protection independent of the speed of the 

motor, thus of the speed of the motor fan. See the functions, 

Motor I 2 t type [231] and Motor I 2 t current [232]. 

3.7 Motors in parallel 

It is possible to have motors in parallel as long as the total 

current does not exceed the nominal value of the VSD. The 

following has to be taken into account when setting the 

motor data: 

Menu [221] 

Motor Voltage: 

Menu [222] 

Motor Frequency: 

Menu [223] 

Motor Power: 

Menu [224] 

Motor Current: 

Menu [225] 

Motor Speed: 

Menu [227] 

Motor Cos PHI: 

The motors in parallel must have the 

same motor voltage. 

The motors in parallel must have the 

same motor frequency. 

Add the motor power values for the 

motors in parallel. 

Add the current for the motors in parallel. 

Set the average speed for the motors in 

parallel. 

Set the average Cos PHI value for the 

motors in parallel. 

20 Installation Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

4. Control Connections 

4.1 Control board 

Fig. 28 shows the layout of the control board which is where 

the parts most important to the user are located. Although 

the control board is galvanically isolated from the mains, for 

safety reasons do not make changes while the mains supply 

is on! 

WARNING: Always switch off the mains 

voltage and wait at least 5 minutes to allow 

the DC capacitors to discharge before 

connecting the control signals or changing 

position of any switches. If the option External supply is 

used, switch of the mains to the option. This is done to 

prevent damage on the control board. 

X5 

X6 

X7 

X4 

1 

Option 

2 

3 

C 

Communication 

X8 

Control 

Panel 

Switches 

S1 S2 S3 S4 

I U I U I U I U 

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 

X1 

1 

Control 

signals 

AO1 AO2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DO1 DO2 DI8 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

11 

R02 

41 42 43 

Relay outputs 

NC C NO 

X2 31 32 33 51 52 

+10V AI1 

AI2 

AI3 

AI4 

-10V 

DI1 

DI2 

DI3 +24V 

NC 

C 

R01 

NO 

X3 

NO 

C 

R03 

Fig. 28 Control board layout 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Control Connections 21

4.2 Terminal connections 

The terminal strip for connecting the control signals is 

accessible after opening the front panel. 

The table describes the default functions for the signals. The 

inputs and outputs are programmable for other functions as 

described in chapter 11. page 63. For signal specifications 

refer to chapter 14. page 163. 

NOTE: The maximum total combined current for outputs 

11, 20 and 21 is 100mA. 

Table 14 

Control signals 

Terminal Name Function (Default) 

Outputs 

1 +10 V +10 VDC supply voltage 

6 -10 V -10 VDC supply voltage 

7 Common Signal ground 

11 +24 V +24 VDC supply voltage 



Digital inputs 

8 DigIn 1 RunL (reverse) 

9 DigIn 2 RunR (forward) 

10 DigIn 3 Off 





22 DigIn 8 RESET 

Digital outputs 

20 DigOut 1 Ready 

21 DigOut 2 Brake 

Analogue inputs 

2 AnIn 1 Process Ref 

3 AnIn 2 Off 

4 AnIn 3 Off 

5 AnIn 4 Off 

Analogue outputs 

13 Speed Min speed to max speed 

14 Torque 0 to max torque 

Relay outputs 

31 N/C 1 

Relay 1 output 

32 COM 1 Trip, active when the VSD is in a 

33 N/O 1 

TRIP condition. 

Table 14 

41 N/C 2 

42 COM 2 

43 N/O 2 

Relay 2 output 

Run, active when the VSD is 

started. 

51 COM 3 Relay 3 output 

52 N/O 3 Off 

NOTE: N/C is opened when the relay is active and N/O is 

closed when the relay is active. 

4.3 Inputs configuration 

with the switches 

The switches S1 to S4 are used to set the input configuration 

for the 4 analogue inputs AnIn1, AnIn2, AnIn3 and AnIn4 

as described in table 15. See Fig. 28 for the location of the 

switches. 

Table 15 

Switch settings 

Input Signal type Switch 

AnIn1 

AnIn2 

AnIn3 

AnIn4 


Terminal Name Function (Default) 

Voltage 

Current (default) 

Voltage 


Voltage 


Voltage 


S1 

S1 

S2 

S2 

S3 

S3 

S4 

S4 

NOTE: Scaling and offset of AnIn1 - AnIn4 can be 

configured using the software. See menus [512], [515], 

[518] and [51B] in section 11.5, page 115. 

NOTE: the 2 analogue outputs AnOut 1 and AnOut 2 can 

be configured using the software. See menu [530] 

section 11.5.3, page 124 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

22 Control Connections Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

4.4 Connection example 

Fig. 29 gives an overall view of a VSD connection example. 

L1 

L2 

L3 

PE 

RFIfilter 

U 

V 

W 

Motor 

Alternative for 

potentiometer control** 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

0 - 10 V 

4 - 20 mA 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

22 

Optional 

+10 VDC 

AnIn 1: Reference 

AnIn 2 

AnIn 3 

Common 

AnIn 4 

AnOut 1 

-10 VDC AnOut 2 

Common DigOut 1 

DigIn 1:RunL* DigOut 2 

DigIn 2:RunR* 

DigIn3 

+24 VDC 

Relay 1 

Common 

DigIn 4 

DigIn 5 

DigIn 6 

Relay 2 

DigIn 7 

DigIn 8:Reset* 

DC+ 

R 

DC - 

12 

13 

21 14 

20 

21 

31 

32 

33 

41 

42 

43 

Relay 3 

51 

52 

RESET 

LOC/ 

REM 

PREV NEXT ESC 

Other options 

ENTER 

Fieldbus option 

or PC 

Option board 

* Default setting 

** The switch S1 is set to U 

Fig. 29 Connection example 

NG_06-F27 


4.5 Connecting the Control 

Signals 

4.5.1 Cables 

The standard control signal connections are suitable for 

stranded flexible wire up to 1.5 mm 2 and for solid wire up to 

2.5 mm 2 . 



Fig. 30 Connecting the control signals 003 to 018 


NOTE: The screening of control signal cables is 

necessary to comply with the immunity levels given in 

the EMC Directive (it reduces the noise level). 

NOTE: Control cables must be separated from motor and 

mains cables. 




4.5.2 Types of control signals 

Always make a distinction between the different types of signals. 

Because the different types of signals can adversely 

affect each other, use a separate cable for each type. This is 

often more practical because, for example, the cable from a 

pressure sensor may be connected directly to the variable 

speed drive. 

We can distinguish between the following types of control 

signals: 

Analogue inputs 

Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) normally 

used as control signals for speed, torque and PID feedback 

signals. 

Analogue outputs 

Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) which 

change slowly or only occasionally in value. In general, these 

are control or measurement signals. 

Digital 

Voltage or current signals (0-10 V, 0-24 V, 0/4-20 mA) 

which can have only two values (high or low) and only occasionally 

change in value. 

Data 

Usually voltage signals (0-5 V, 0-10 V) which change rapidly 

and at a high frequency, generally data signals such as 

RS232, RS485, Profibus, etc. 

Relay 

Relay contacts (0-250 VAC) can switch highly inductive 

loads (auxiliary relay, lamp, valve, brake, etc.). 

4.5.4 Single-ended or double-ended 

connection? 

In principle, the same measures applied to motor cables 

must be applied to all control signal cables, in accordance 

with the EMC-Directives. 

For all signal cables as mentioned in section 4.5.2 the best 

results are obtained if the screening is connected to both 

ends. See Fig. 33. 

NOTE: Each installation must be examined carefully 

before applying the proper EMC measurements. 

Control board 

Pressure 

sensor 

(example) 

Signal 

type 

Maximum wire size 

Tightening 

torque 

Cable type 

External control 

(e.g. in metal housing) 

0.5 Nm 

Analogue Rigid cable: 

Digital 

0.14-2.5 mm 2 

Flexible cable: 

Data 0.14-1.5 mm 2 

Relay 0.25-1.5 mm 2 

Cable with ferrule: 

Screened 

Screened 

Screened 

Not screened 

Control consol 

Example: 

The relay output from a variable speed drive which controls 

an auxiliary relay can, at the moment of switching, form a 

source of interference (emission) for a measurement signal 

from, for example, a pressure sensor. Therefore it is advised 

to separate wiring and screening to reduce disturbances. 

Fig. 33 Electro Magnetic (EM) screening of control signal 

cables. 

4.5.3 Screening 

For all signal cables the best results are obtained if the 

screening is connected to both ends: the VSD side and the at 

the source (e.g. PLC, or computer). See Fig. 33. 

It is strongly recommended that the signal cables be allowed 

to cross mains and motor cables at a 90° angle. Do not let 

the signal cable go in parallel with the mains and motor 

cable. 


4.5.5 Current signals ((0)4-20 mA) 

A current signal like (0)4-20 mA is less sensitive to disturbances 

than a 0-10 V signal, because it is connected to an 

input which has a lower impedance (250 Ω) than a voltage 

signal (20 kΩ). It is therefore strongly advised to use current 

control signals if the cables are longer than a few metres. 

4.5.6 Twisted cables 

Analogue and digital signals are less sensitive to interference 

if the cables carrying them are “twisted”. This is certainly to 

be recommended if screening cannot be used. By twisting 

the wires the exposed areas are minimised. This means that 

in the current circuit for any possible High Frequency (HF) 

interference fields, no voltage can be induced. For a PLC it 

is therefore important that the return wire remains in proximity 

to the signal wire. It is important that the pair of wires 

is fully twisted over 360°. 

4.6 Connecting options 

The option cards are connected by the optional connectors 

X4 or X5 on the control board see Fig. 28, page 21 and 

mounted above the control board. The inputs and outputs 

of the option cards are connected in the same way as other 

control signals. 


5. Getting Started 

This chapter is a step by step guide that will show you the 

quickest way to get the motor shaft turning. We will show 

you two examples, remote control and local control. 

We assume that the VSD is mounted on a wall or in a cabinet 

as in the chapter 2. page 9. 

First there is general information of how to connect mains, 

motor and control cables. The next section describes how to 

use the function keys on the control panel. The subsequent 

examples covering remote control and local control describe 

how to program/set the motor data and run the VSD and 

motor. 

5.1 Connect the mains and 

motor cables 

Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local 

regulations. The cable must be able to carry the VSD load 

current. 

5.1.1 Mains cables 

1. Connect the mains cables as in Fig. 34. The VSD has, as 

standard, a built-in RFI mains filter that complies with 

category C3 which suits the Second Environment standard. 

5.1.2 Motor cables 

2. Connect the motor cables as in Fig. 34. To comply with 

the EMC Directive you have to use screened cables and 

the motor cable screen has to be connected on both 

sides: to the housing of the motor and the housing of the 

VSD. 

Table 16 

L1,L2,L3 

PE 

U, V, W 

Mains and motor connection 

Mains supply, 3 -phase 

Safety earth 

Motor earth 

Motor output, 3-phase 

WARNING: In order to work safely the mains 

earth must be connected to PE and the motor 

earth to . 

5.2 Using the function keys 

100 200 300 

Fig. 35 Example of menu navigation when entering motor 

voltage 

ENTER 

ESC 

NEXT 

ENTER 

210 

PREV 

NEXT 

ENTER 

220 

221 

ENTER 

step to lower menu level or confirm changed setting 

step to higher menu level or ignore changed setting 

ESC 

RFI-Filter 

Mains 

VSD 

NEXT 

PREV 

step to next menu on the same level 

step to previous menu on the same level 

Metal EMC cable 

glands 


increase value or change selection 

decrease value or change selection 

Brake 

resistor 

(option) 

Output 

coils 

(option) 

Metal housing 


Metal cable gland 

Motor 

Mains 

Fig. 34 Connection of mains and motor cables 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Getting Started 27

5.3 Remote control 

In this example external signals are used to control the VSD/ 

motor. 

A standard 4-pole motor for 400 V, an external start button 

and a reference value will also be used. 

5.3.1 Connect control cables 

Here you will make up the minimum wiring for starting. In 

this example the motor/VSD will run with right rotation. 

To comply with the EMC standard, use screened control 

cables with plaited flexible wire up to 1.5 mm 2 or solid wire 

up to 2.5 mm 2 . 

3. Connect a reference value between terminals 7 (Common) 

and 2 (AnIn 1) as in Fig. 36. 

4. Connect an external start button between terminal 11 

(+24 VDC) and 9 (DigIn2, RUNR) as in Fig. 36. 

Reference 

4-20 mA 

Start 

+ 

0V 

X1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

1. Press to display menu [200], Main Setup. 

NEXT 

2. Press and then to display menu [220], Motor 

ENTER 

NEXT 

Data. 

3. Press to display menu [221] and set motor voltage. 

ENTER 

4. Change the value using the and keys. Confirm 

with . ENTER 

5. Set motor frequency [222]. 

6. Set motor power [223]. 

7. Set motor current [224]. 

8. Set motor speed [225]. 

9. Set power factor (cos ϕ) [227]. 

10. Select supply voltage level used [21B] 

11. [229] Motor ID run: Choose Short, confirm with 

and give start command . 

The VSD will now measure some motor parameters. 

The motor makes some beeping sounds but the shaft 

does not rotate. When the ID run is finished after about 

one minute ("Test Run OK!" is displayed), press to 

RESET 

continue. 

12. Use AnIn1 as input for the reference value. The default 

range is 4-20 mA. If you need a 0-10 V reference value, 

change switch (S1) on control board and set [512] Anln 

1 Set-up to 0-10V. 

13. Switch off power supply. 

14. Connect digital and analogue inputs/outputs as in 

Fig. 36. 

15. Ready! 

16. Switch on power supply. 

ENTER 

X3 

X2 

31 

32 

33 

51 

52 

41 

42 

43 

5.3.4 Run the VSD 

Now the installation is finished, and you can press the external 

start button to start the motor. 

When the motor is running the main connections are OK. 

Fig. 36 Wiring 

5.3.2 Switch on the mains 

Close the door to the VSD. Once the mains is switched on, 

the internal fan in the VSD will run for 5 seconds. 

5.3.3 Set the Motor Data 

Enter correct motor data for the connected motor. The 

motor data is used in the calculation of complete operational 

data in the VSD. 

Change settings using the keys on the control panel. For further 

information about the control panel and menu structure, 

see the chapter 9. page 51. 

Menu [100], Preferred View is displayed when started. 

28 Getting Started Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

5.4 Local control 

Manual control via the control panel can be used to carry 

out a test run. 

Use a 400 V motor and the control panel. 

5.4.1 Switch on the mains 

Close the door to the VSD. Once the mains is switched on, 

the VSD is started and the internal fan will run for 5 seconds. 

5.4.2 Select manual control 

Menu [100], Preferred View is displayed when started. 

1. Press to display menu [200], Main Setup. 

NEXT 

2. Press to display menu [210], Operation. 

ENTER 

3. Press to display menu [211], Language. 

ENTER 

4. Press to display menu [214], Reference Control. 

NEXT 

5. Select Keyboard using the key and press to confirm. 

ENTER 

6. Press to get to menu [215], Run/Stop Control. 

NEXT 

7. Select Keyboard using the key and press to confirm. 

ENTER 

8. Press to get to previous menu level and then to 

ESC 

NEXT 

display menu [220], Motor Data. 

5.4.3 Set the Motor Data 

Enter correct motor data for the connected motor. 

9. Press to display menu [221]. 

ENTER 

10. Change the value using the and keys. Confirm 

with . ENTER 

11. Press to display menu [222]. 

NEXT 

12. Repeat step 9 and 10 until all motor data is entered. 

13. Press twice and then to display menu [100], Preferred 

ESC 

PREV 

View. 

5.4.4 Enter a Reference Value 

Enter a reference value. 

14. Press until menu [300], Process is displayed. 

NEXT 

15. Press to display menu [310], Set/View reference 

ENTER 

value. 

16. Use the and keys to enter, for example, 300 

rpm. We select a low value to check the rotation direction 

without damaging the application. 

5.4.5 Run the VSD 

Press the key on the control panel to run the motor forward. 

If the motor is running the main connections are OK. 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Getting Started 29

30 Getting Started Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

6. Applications 

This chapter contains tables giving an overview of many different 

applications/duties in which it is suitable to use variable 

speed drives from Emotron. Further on you will find 

application examples of the most common applications and 

solutions. 

6.1 Application overview 

6.1.1Pumps 

Challenge Emotron FDU solution Menu 

Dry-running, cavitation and overheating damage 

the pump and cause downtime. 

Sludge sticks to impeller when pump has been running 

at low speed or been stationary for a while. 

Reduces the pump’s efficiency. 

Motor runs at same speed despite varying 

demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and 

equipment stressed. 

Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked pipe, a 

valve not fully opened or a worn impeller. 

Water hammer damages the pump when stopped. 

Mechanical stress on pipes, valves, gaskets, seals. 

Pump Curve Protection detects deviation. Sends 

warning or activates safety stop. 

Automatic pump rinsing function: pump is set to 

run at full speed at certain intervals, then return 

to normal speed. 

PID continuously adapts pressure/flow to the 

level required. Sleep function activated when 

none is needed. 

Pump Curve Protection detects deviation. Warning 

is sent or safety stop activated. 

Smooth linear stops protect the equipment. Eliminates 

need for costly motorized valves. 

411–419, 41C1– 41C9 

362–368, 560, 640 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

331–336 

6.1.2Fans 


Starting a fan rotating in the wrong direction can be 

critical, e.g. a tunnel fan in event of a fire. 

Draft causes turned off fan to rotate the wrong way. 

Starting causes high current peaks and mechanical 

stress. 

Regulating pressure/flow with dampers causes 

high energy consumption and equipment wear. 


demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and 

equipment stressed. 

Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked filter, a 

damper not fully opened or a worn belt. 

Fan is started at low speed to ensure correct 

direction and proper function. 

Motor is gradually slowed to complete stop before 

starting. Avoids blown fuses and breakdown. 

Automatic regulation of pressure/flow with motor 

speed gives more exact control. 

PID continuously adapts to the level required. 

Sleep function is activated when none is needed. 

Load Curve Protection detects deviation. Warning 

is sent or safety stop activated. 

219, 341 

219, 33A, 335 

321, 354 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Applications 31

6.1.3Compressors 


Compressor is damaged when cooling media 

enters the compressor screw. 

Pressure is higher than needed, causing leaks, 

stress on the equipment and excessive air use. 

Motor runs at same speed when no air is compressed. 

Energy is lost and equipment stressed. 

Process inefficiency and energy wasted due to e.g. 

the compressor idling. 

Overload situation is quickly detected and safety 

stop can be activated to avoid breakdown. 

Load Curve Protection function detects deviation. 

Warning is sent or safety stop activated. 

PID continuously adapts to the level required. 

Sleep function activated when none is needed. 

Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation. 


411–41A 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

6.1.4Blowers 


Difficult to compensate for pressure fluctuations. 

Wasted energy and risk of production stop. 


demands. Energy is lost and equipment stressed. 

Process inefficiency due to e.g. a broken damper, a 

valve not fully opened or a worn belt. 

PID function continuously adapts pressure to the 

level required. 

PID continuously adapts air flow to level required. 

Sleep function activated when none is needed. 

Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation. 


320, 380 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

32 Applications Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

7. Main Features 

This chapter contains descriptions of the main features of 

the VSD. 

7.1 Parameter sets 

Parameter sets are used if an application requires different 

settings for different modes. For example, a machine can be 

used for producing different products and thus requires two 

or more maximum speeds and acceleration/deceleration 

times. With the four parameter sets different control options 

can be configured with respect to quickly changing the 

behaviour of the VSD. It is possible to adapt the VSD 

online to altered machine behaviour. This is based on the 

fact that at any desired moment any one of the four parameter 

sets can be activated during Run or Stop, via the digital 

inputs or the control panel and menu [241]. 

Each parameter set can be selected externally via a digital 

input. Parameter sets can be changed during operation and 

stored in the control panel. 

NOTE: The only data not included in the parameter set is 

Motor data 1-4, (entered separately), language, 

communication settings, selected set, local remote, and 

keyboard locked. 

Define parameter sets 

When using parameter sets you first decide how to select different 

parameter sets. The parameter sets can be selected via 

the control panel, via digital inputs or via serial communication. 

All digital inputs and virtual inputs can be configured 

to select parameter set. The function of the digital inputs is 

defined in the menu [520]. 

Fig. 37 shows the way the parameter sets are activated via 

any digital input configured to Set Ctrl 1 or Set Ctrl 2. 

11 +24 V 

10 Set Ctrl1 

16 Set Ctrl2 

Fig. 37 Selecting the parameter sets 

{ 

Parameter Set A 

Run/Stop 

- 

- 

Torques 

- 

- 

Controllers 

- 

- 

Limits/Prot. 

- 

-Max Alarm 

Set B 

Set C 

Set D 

(NG06-F03_1) 

Select and copy parameter set 

The parameter set selection is done in menu [241], Select 

Set. First select the main set in menu [241], normally A. 

Adjust all settings for the application. Usually most parameters 

are common and therefore it saves a lot of work by copying 

set A>B in menu [242]. When parameter set A is 

copied to set B you only change the parameters in the set 

that need to be changed. Repeat for C and D if used. 

With menu [242], Copy Set, it is easy to copy the complete 

contents of a single parameter set to another parameter set. 

If, for example, the parameter sets are selected via digital 

inputs, DigIn 3 is set to Set Ctrl 1 in menu [523] and DigIn 

4 is set to Set Ctrl 2 in menu [524], they are activated as in 

Table 17. 

Activate the parameter changes via digital input by setting 

menu [241], Select Set to DigIn. 

Table 17 

Parameter set 

Parameter set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2 

A 0 0 

B 1 0 

C 0 1 

D 1 1 

NOTE: The selection via the digital inputs is immediately 

activated. The new parameter settings will be activated 

on-line, also during Run. 

NOTE: The default parameter set is parameter set A. 

Examples 

Different parameter sets can be used to easily change the 

setup of a VSD to adapt quickly to different application 

requirements. For example when 

• a process needs optimized settings in different stages of 

the process, to 

- increase the process quality 

- increase control accuracy 

- lower maintenance costs 

- increase operator safety 

With these settings a large number of options are available. 

Some ideas are given here: 

Multi frequency selection 

Within a single parameter set the 7 preset references can be 

selected via the digital inputs. In combination with the 

parameter sets, 28 preset references can be selected using all 

4 digital inputs: DigIn1, 2 and 3 for selecting preset reference 

within one parameter set and DigIn 4 and DigIn 5 for 

selecting the parameter sets. 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Main Features 33

Bottling machine with 3 different products 

Use 3 parameter sets for 3 different Jog reference speeds 

when the machine needs to be set up. The 4th parameter set 

can be used for “normal” remote control when the machine 

is running at full production. 

Manual - automatic control 

If in an application something is filled up manually and then 

the level is automatically controlled using PID regulation, 

this is solved using one parameter set for the manual control 

and one for the automatic control. 

7.1.1 One motor and one parameter 

set 

This is the most common application for pumps and fans. 

Once default motor M1 and parameter set A have been 

selected: 

1. Enter the settings for motor data. 

2. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs and 

outputs 

7.1.2 One motor and two parameter 

sets 

This application is useful if you for example have a machine 

running at two different speeds for different products. 

Once default motor M1 is selected: 

1. Select parameter set A in menu [241]. 

2. Enter motor data in menu [220]. 

3. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs and 

outputs. 

4. If there are only minor differences between the settings 

in the parameter sets, you can copy parameter set A to 

parameter set B, menu [242]. 

5. Enter the settings for parameters e.g. inputs and outputs. 

Note: Do not change motor data in parameter set B. 

7.1.3 Two motors and two parameter 

sets 

This is useful if you have a machine with two motors that 

can not run at the same time, such as a cable winding 

machine that lifts up the reel with one motor and then turns 

the wheel with the other motor. 

One motor must stop before changing to an other motor. 

1. Select parameter set A in menu [241]. 

2. Select motor M1 in menu [212]. 

3. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e.g. 

inputs and outputs. 

4. Select parameter set B in menu [241]. 

5. Select M2 in menu [212]. 

6. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e.g. 

inputs and outputs. 

7.1.4 Autoreset at trip 

For several non-critical application-related failure conditions, 

it is possible to automatically generate a reset command 

to overcome the fault condition. The selection can be 

made in menu [250]. In this menu the maximum number of 

automatically generated restarts allowed can be set, see menu 

[251], after this the VSD will stay in fault condition because 

external assistance is required. 

Example 

The motor is protected by an internal protection for thermal 

overload. When this protection is activated, the VSD should 

wait until the motor is cooled down enough before resuming 

normal operation. When this problem occurs three times in 

a short period of time, external assistance is required. 

The following settings should be applied: 

• Insert maximum number of restarts; set menu [251] to 

3. 

• Activate Motor I 2 t to be automatically reset; set menu 

[25A] to 300 s. 

• Set relay 1, menu [551] to AutoRst Trip; a signal will be 

available when the maximum number of restarts is 

reached and the VSD stays in fault condition. 

• The reset input must be constantly activated. 

7.1.5 Reference priority 

The active speed reference signal can be programmed from 

several sources and functions. The table below shows the 

priority of the different functions with regards to the speed 

reference. 

Table 18 

Jog 

Mode 

Reference priority 

Preset 

Reference 

Motor Pot 

Ref. Signal 

On/Off On/Off On/Off Option cards 

On On/Off On/Off Jog Ref 

Off On On/Off Preset Ref 

Off Off On Motor pot commands 

34 Main Features Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

7.1.6 Preset references 

The VSD is able to select fixed speeds via the control of digital 

inputs. This can be used for situations where the 

required motor speed needs to be adapted to fixed values, 

according to certain process conditions. Up to 7 preset references 

can be set for each parameter set, which can be 

selected via all digital inputs that are set to Preset Ctrl1, Preset 

Ctrl2 or Preset Ctrl3. The amount digital inputs used 

that are set to Preset Ctrl determines the number of Preset 

References available; using 1 input gives 2 speeds, using 2 

inputs gives 4 speeds and using 3 inputs gives 8 speeds. 

Example 

The use of four fixed speeds, at 50 / 100 / 300 / 800 rpm, 

requires the following settings: 

• Set DigIn 5 as first selection input; set [525] to Preset 

Ctrl1. 

• Set DigIn 6 as second selection input; set [526] to Preset 

Ctrl2. 

• Set menu [341], Min Speed to 50 rpm. 

• Set menu [362], Preset Ref 1 to 100 rpm. 



With these settings, the VSD switched on and a RUN command 

given, the speed will be: 

• 50 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are low. 

• 100 rpm, when DigIn 5 is high and DigIn 6 is low. 

• 300 rpm, when DigIn 5 is low and DigIn 6 is high. 

• 800 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are high. 

7.2 Remote control functions 

Operation of the Run/Stop/Enable/Reset functions 

As default, all the run/stop/reset related commands are programmed 

for remote operation via the inputs on the terminal 

strip (terminals 1-22) on the control board. With the 

function Run/Stp Ctrl [215] and Reset Control [216], this 

can be selected for keyboard or serial communication control. 

NOTE: The examples in this paragraph do not cover all 

possibilities. Only the most relevant combinations are 

given. The starting point is always the default setting 

(factory) of the VSD. 

Default settings of the Run/Stop/ 

Enable/Reset functions 

The default settings are shown in Fig. 38. In this example 

the VSD is started and stopped with DigIn 2 and a reset 

after trip can be given with DigIn 8. 

Fig. 38 Default setting Run/Reset commands 

The inputs are default set for level-control. The rotation is 

determined by the setting of the digital inputs. 

Enable and Stop functions 

Both functions can be used separately or simultaneously. 

The choice of which function is to be used depends on the 

application and the control mode of the inputs (Level/Edge 

[21A]). 

NOTE: In Edge mode, at least one digital input must be 

programmed to “stop”, because the Run commands are 

otherwise only able to start the VSD. 

Enable 

Input must be active (HI) to allow any Run signal. If the 

input is made LOW, the output of the VSD is immediately 

disabled and the motor will coast. 

! 

RunR 

Reset 

+24 V 

CAUTION: If the Enable function is not 

programmed to a digital input, it is considered 

to be active internally. 

Stop 

If the input is low then the VSD will stop according to the 

selected stop mode set in menu [33B] Stop Mode. Fig. 39 

shows the function of the Enable and the Stop input and the 

Stop Mode=Decel [33B]. 

To run the input must be high. 

NOTE: Stop Mode=Coast [33B] will give the same 

behaviour as the Enable input. 

X1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

X 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 


STOP 

(STOP=DECEL) 

OUTPUT 

SPEED 

ENABLE 

OUTPUT 

SPEED 

(06-F104_NG) 

(or if Spinstart is selected) 

Fig. 39 Functionality of the Stop and Enable input 

t 

t 

Stop 

RunL 

RunR 

Enable 

Reset 

+24 V 

Fig. 40 Example of wiring for Run/Stop/Enable/Reset inputs 

The Enable input must be continuously active in order to 

accept any run-right or run-left command. If both RunR 

and RunL inputs are active, then the VSD stops according 

to the selected Stop Mode. Fig. 41 gives an example of a possible 

sequence. 

X1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

Reset and Autoreset operation 

If the VSD is in Stop Mode due to a trip condition, the 

VSD can be remotely reset by a pulse (“low” to “high” transition) 

on the Reset input, default on DigIn 8. Depending 

on the selected control method, a restart takes place as follows: 

Level-control 

If the Run inputs remain in their position the VSD will start 

immediately after the Reset command is given. 

Edge-control 

After the Reset command is given a new Run command 

must be applied to start the VSD again. 

Autoreset is enabled if the Reset input is continuously active. 

The Autoreset functions are programmed in menu Autoreset 

[250]. 

NOTE: If the control commands are programmed for 

Keyboard control or Com, Autoreset is not possible. 

Run Inputs Level-controlled. 

The inputs are set as default for level-control. This means 

that an input is activated by making the input continuously 

“High”. This method is commonly used if, for example, 

PLCs are used to operate the VSD. 

INPUTS 

ENABLE 

STOP 

RUN R 

RUN L 

OUTPUT 

STATUS 

Right rotation 

Left rotation 

Standstill 

Fig. 41 Input and output status for level-control 

(06-F103new_1) 

Run Inputs Edge-controlled 

Menu [21A] Start signal Level/Edge must be set to Edge to 

activate edge control. This means that an input is activated 

by a “low” to “high” transition or vice versa. 

! 

CAUTION: Level-controlled inputs DO NOT 

comply with the Machine Directive, if the inputs 

are directly used to start and stop the machine. 

NOTE: Edge-controlled inputs comply with the Machine 

Directive (see chapter EMC and Machine Directive), if 

the inputs are directly used for starting and stopping the 

machine. 

The examples given in this and the following paragraphs follow 

the input selection shown in Fig. 40. 


See Fig. 40. The Enable and Stop input must be active continuously 

in order to accept any run-right or run-left command. 

The last edge (RunR or RunL) is valid. Fig. 42 gives 

an example of a possible sequence. 

INPUTS 

ENABLE 

STOP 

RUN R 

RUN L 

OUTPUT 

STATUS 

7.4 Using the Control Panel 

Memory 

Data can be copied from the VSD to the memory in the 

control panel and vice versa. To copy all data (including 

parameter set A-D and motor data) from the VSD to the 

control panel, select Copy to CP[244], Copy to CP. 

To copy data from the control panel to the VSD, enter the 

menu [245], Load from CP and select what you want to 

copy. 

The memory in the control panel is useful in applications 

with VSDs without a control panel and in applications 

where several variable speed drives have the same setup. It 

can also be used for temporary storage of settings. Use a control 

panel to upload the settings from one VSD and then 

move the control panel to another VSD and download the 

settings. 

NOTE: Load from and copy to the VSD is only possible 

when the VSD is in stop mode. 

Right rotation 

Left rotation 

Standstill 

(06-F94new_1) 

VSD 

Fig. 42 Input and output status for edge-control 

7.3 Performing an 

Identification Run 

To get the optimum performance out of your VSD/motor 

combination, the VSD must measure the electrical parameters 

(resistance of stator winding, etc.) of the connected 

motor. See menu [229], Motor ID-Run. 

Fig. 43 Copy and load parameters between VSD and control 

panel 


7.5 Load Monitor and Process 

Protection [400] 

7.5.1 Load Monitor [410] 

The monitor functions enable the VSD to be used as a load 

monitor. Load monitors are used to protect machines and 

processes against mechanical overload and underload, such 

as a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming, belt failure on 

a fan or a pump dry running. The load is measured in the 

VSD by the calculated motor shaft torque. There is an overload 

alarm (Max Alarm and Max Pre-Alarm) and an underload 

alarm (Min Alarm and Min Pre-Alarm). 

The Basic Monitor type uses fixed levels for overload and 

underload (pre-)alarms over the whole speed range. This 

function can be used in constant load applications where the 

torque is not dependent on the speed, e.g. conveyor belt, 

displacement pump, screw pump, etc. 

For applications with a torque that is dependent on the 

speed, the Load Curve monitor type is preferred. By measuring 

the actual load curve of the process, characteristically 

over the range of minimum speed to maximum speed, an 

accurate protection at any speed can be established. 

The max and min alarm can be set for a trip condition. The 

pre-alarms act as a warning condition. All the alarms can be 

monitored on the digital or relay outputs. 

The autoset function automatically sets the 4 alarm levels 

whilst running: maximum alarm, maximum pre-alarm, minimum 

alarm and minimum pre-alarm. 

Fig. 44 gives an example of the monitor functions for constant 

torque applications 


. 

Torque [%] 

[4161] MaxAlarmMar (15%) 

[4171] MaxPreAlMar (10%) 

[41B] 

100% 

Default: T NOM or 

Autoset: T MOMENTARY 

[4181] MinPreAlMar (10%) 

[4191] MinAlarmMar (15%) 

Max Alarm 

Max PreAlarm 

Min Alarm 

Min PreAlarm 

Ramp-up phase 

[413] Ramp Alarm=On 

[411] Alarm Select=Max or Max0Min 

[4162] MaxAlarmDel (0.1s) 

[4172] MaxPreAlDel (0.1s) 

[414] Start Delay (0.2s) 

Stationary phase 

Stationary phase 

Ramp-down phase 

[413] Ramp Alarm=On or Off 

[413] Ramp Alarm=On or Off [413] Ramp Alarm=On 

[411] Alarm Select=Max or Max0Min [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max0Min [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max0Min 

[4162] MaxAlarmDel (0.1s) 

t [s] 

[4172] MaxPreAlDel (0.1s) 

Must be

7.6 Pump function 

7.6.1 Introduction 

A maximum of 4 pumps can be controlled with the standard 

FDU variable speed drive. 

If I/O Board options are installed, a maximum of 7 pumps 

can be controlled. The I/O Board can also be used as a general 

extended I/O. 

The Pump Control function is used to control a number of 

drives (pumps, fans, etc., with a maximum of 3 additional 

drives per I/O-board connected) of which one is always 

driven by the FDU. Other names for this kind of controllers 

are 'Cascade controller' or 'Hydrophore controller'. 

Depending on the flow, pressure or temperature, additional 

pumps can be activated via the appropriate signals by the 

output relays of the FDU and/or the I/O Board. The system 

is developed in such a way that one FDU will be the master 

of the system. 

Select relay on the control board or on an option board. The 

relays are set to functions for controlling pumps. In the pictures 

in this section, the relays are named R:Function, e.g. 

R:SlavePump1, which means a relay on the control board or 

on a option board set to function SlavePump1. 

PM 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

All additional pumps can be activated via an VSD, soft 

starter, Y/ Δ or D.O.L. switches. 

Set 

PRESSURE 

Feedback 

PRESSURE 


R:SlavePump1 

MASTER 

R:SlavePump2 

AnIn 

PID 

AnIn 

PM 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump4 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump6 

Pressure 

Fig. 46 Pressure control with pump control 

4 

3 

2 

1 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

Power 

Flow 

(50-PC-2_1) 

Pumps in parallel will operate as a flow controller, See Fig. 

45. 

Pumps in series will operate as a pressure controller see Fig. 

46. The basic control principle is shown in Fig. 47. 

Set FLOW 

Feedback 

FLOW 


R:SlavePump1 

MASTER 

R:SlavePump2 

AnIn 

PID 

AnIn 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump4 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump6 

NOTE: Read this instruction manual carefully before 

commencing installation, connecting or working with 

the variable speed drive. 

FREQUENCY (master pump P) 

Add pump 

Pressure 

Stop pump 

Power 

1 2 3 4 

Flow 

(50-PC-1_1) 

P=on 

P1=on P2=on P3=on P4=on P5=on P6=on 

FLOW / 

PRESSURE 

Fig. 45 Flow control with pump control 

FLOW / 

PRESSURE 

TIM E 

(50-PC-3_1) 

Fig. 47 Basic Control principle 


7.6.2 Fixed MASTER 

This is the default setting of the Pump Control. The FDU 

controls the Master pump which is always running. The 

relay outputs start and stop the other pumps P1 to P6, 

depending on flow/pressure. In this configuration a maximum 

of 7 pumps can be controlled, see Fig. 48. To equalize 

the lifetime of the additional pumps it is possible to select 

the pumps depending on the run time history of each pump. 

R: SlavePump6 

R: SlavePump5 


R: SlavePump4 

R: SlavePump3 

MASTER 

R: SlavePump2 

R: SlavePump1 

R: MasterPump6 






(NG_50-PC-5_1) 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

R:SlavePump6 

R:SlavePump5 

FDU R:SlavePump4 

MASTER R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

See menu: 

[393] to [396] 

[553] to [55C] 

(NG_50-PC-4_1) 

PM 

See menu: 

[393] Select Drive 

[39H] to [39N] Run Time 1 - 6, Pump 

[554] to [55C] Relays 

Fig. 48 Fixed MASTER control 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

NOTE: The pumps MAY have different powers, however 

the MASTER pump MUST always be the largest. 

7.6.3 Alternating MASTER 

With this function the Master pump is not fixed to the FDU 

all the time. After the VSD is powered up or started again 

after a stop or sleep mode the Master pump is selected via 

the relay set to function Master Pump. section 7.6.7 on page 

44 shows a detailed wiring diagram with 3 pumps. The purpose 

of this function is that all pumps are used equally, so 

the lifetime of all pumps, including the Master pump, will 

be equalized. Maximum 6 pumps can be controlled with 

this function. 

Fig. 49 Alternating MASTER Control 

NOTE: The pumps MUST have all the same power. 

7.6.4 Feedback 'Status' input 

In this example the additional pumps are controlled by an 

other kind of drive (e.g. soft starter, frequency inverter, etc.). 

The digital inputs on the I/O Board can be programmed as a 

"Error" input for each pump. If a drive fails the digital input 

will monitor this and the PUMP CONTROL will not use 

that particular drive anymore and automatically switch to 

another drive. This means that the control continues without 

using this (faulty) drive. This function can also be used 

to manually stop a particular pump for maintenance purposes, 

without shutting down the whole pump system. Of 

course the maximum flow/pressure is then limited to the 

maximum pump power of the remaining pumps. 


See menu: 

[529] to [52H] Digital Input 

[554] to [55C] Relay 


MASTER 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

feedback 

inputs 

DI:Pump1Feedb 

DI:Pump2Feedb 

DI:Pump3Feedb 

other 

drive 

other 

drive 

other 

drive 

(NG_50-PC-6_1) 

Fig. 50 Feedback "Status" input 

PM 

P1 P2 P3 

7.6.5 Fail safe operation 

Some pump systems must always have a minimum flow or 

pressure level, even if the frequency inverter is tripped or 

damaged. So at least 1 or 2 (or maybe all) additional pumps 

must keep running after the inverter is powered down or 

tripped. This kind of "safe" pump operation can be 

obtained by using the NC contacts of the pump control 

relays. These can be programmed for each individual additional 

pump. In this example pumps P5 and P6 will run at 

maximum power if the inverter fails or is powered down. 

See menu: 

[554] to [55C] Relays 

[55D4] to [55DC] Mode 


MASTER 

R:SlavePump6 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump4 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

(50-PC-7_1) 

PM 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

Fig. 51 Example of "Fail safe" operation 


7.6.6 PID control 

When using the Pump Control it is mandatory to activate 

the PID controller function. Analogue inputs AnIn1 to 

AnIn4 can be set as functions for PID set values and/or feedback 

values. 

See menu: 

[381] to [385] 

[553] to [55C] 

[411] to [41C] 

Set 

Value 

Feedback 

Value 


MASTER 

AnIn 

PID 

AnIn 

R:SlavePump6 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump4 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

PM 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

Flow/Pressure 

measurement 

(NG_50-PC-8_1) 

Fig. 52 PID control 


7.6.7 Wiring Alternating Master 

Fig. 53 and Fig. 50 show the relay functions MasterPump1- 

6 and SlavePump1-6. The Master and Additional contactors 

also interlock with each other to prevent dual powering of 

the pump and damage to the inverter. (K1M/K1S, K2M/ 

K2S, K3M/K3S). Before running, the FDU will select a 

pump to be Master, depending on the pump run times. 

CAUTION: The wiring for the Alternating 

Master control needs special attention and 

! should be wired exactly as described here, 

to avoid destructive short circuit at the output of the 

inverter. 

PE 

L1 

L2 

L3 

PE L1 L2 L3 


U V W 

K1S 

K2S 

K3S 

K1M 

K2M 

K3M 

(NG_50-PC-10_1) 

P1 

3~ 

P2 

3~ 

P3 

3~ 

Fig. 53 Power connections for Alternating MASTER circuit 

with 3 pumps 

~ 

B1:R1 

Master 

Pump1 

B2:R1 

Slave 

Pump1 

B1:R2 

Master 

Pump2 

B2:R2 

Slave 

Pump2 

B1:R3 

Master 

Pump3 

B2:R3 

Slave 

Pump3 

K1S K1M K2S 

K2M 

K3S 

K3M 

K1M 

K1S 

K2M 

K2S 

K3M 

K3S 

N 

(NG_50-PC-11_3) 

Fig. 54 Control connections for Alternating MASTER circuit 

with 3 pumps 


7.6.8 Checklist And Tips 

1. Main Functions 

Start by choosing which of the two main functions to use: 

- "Alternating MASTER" function 

In this case the “Master” pump can be alternated, although this function needs slightly more complicated wiring than the 

“Fixed MASTER” function described below. The I/O Board option is necessary. 

- "Fixed MASTER" function: 

One pump is always the master, only the additional pumps alternate. 

Notice that there is a big difference in the wiring of the system between these main functions, so it not possible to switch 

between these 2 functions later on. For further information see section 7.6.2, page 41. 

2. Number of pumps/drives 

3. Pump size 

If the system consists of 2 or 3 pumps the I/O Board option is not needed. However, this does mean that the following 

functions are not then possible: 

- "Alternating MASTER" function 

- With isolated inputs 

With the I/O Board option installed, the maximum number of pumps is: 

- 6 pumps if "Alternating MASTER" function is selected. (see section 7.6.3 on page 41) 

- 7 pumps if "Fixed MASTER" function is selected. (see section 7.6.2, page 41) 

- "Alternating MASTER" function: 

The sizes of the pumps must be equal. 

- "Fixed MASTER" function: 

The pumps may have different power sizes, but the master pump (FDU) must always have the greatest power. 

4. Programming the Digital inputs 

If the digital inputs are used, the digital input function must be set to Drive feedback. 

5. Programming the Relay outputs 

After the Pump controller is switched on in menu [391] the number of drives (pumps, fans, etc.) must be set in menu [392] 

(Number of Drives). The relays themselves must be set to the function SlavePump1-6 and if Alternate master is used, 

MasterPump1-6 as well. 

6. Equal Pumps 

If all pumps are equal in power size it is likely that the Upper band is much smaller than the Lower band, because the maximum 

pump discharge of the master pump is the same if the pump is connected to the mains (50Hz). This can give a very 

narrow hysteresis causing an unstable control area in the flow/pressure. By setting the maximum frequency of the inverter 

only slightly above 50Hz it means that the master pump has a slightly bigger pump discharge than the pump on the mains. 

Of course caution is essential in order to prevent the master pump running at a higher frequency for a longer period of 

time, which in turn prevents the master pump from overloading. 

7. Minimum Speed 

With pumps and fans it is normal to use a minimum speed, because at lower speed the discharge of the pump or fan will 

be low until 30-50% of the nominal speed (depending on size, power, pump properties, etc.). When using a minimum 

speed, a much smoother and better control range of the whole system will be achieved. 


7.6.9 Functional Examples of Start/ 

Stop Transitions 

course other start/stop equipment like a soft starter could be 

controlled by the relay output. 

Starting an additional pump 

This figure shows a possible sequence with all levels and 

functions involved when a additional pump is started by 

means of the pump control relays. The starting of the second 

pump is controlled by one of the relay outputs. The 

relay in this example starts the pump directly on line. Of 

Flow Set view ref. [310] 

Feedback Flow 

time 


Master pump 

Max speed 

[343] 

Upper band 

Transition Speed Start 

[39E] 

Min speed 

[341] 

Lower band 

Start delay [399] 

Settle time start [39D] 

time 

2nd pump 


Start ramp depends 

on start method 

Start command 

time 

Fig. 55 Time sequence starting an additional pump 


Stopping an additional pump 

This figure shows a possible sequence with all levels and 

functions involved when an additional pump is stopped by 

means of the pump control relays. The stopping of the second 

pump is controlled by one of the relay outputs. The 

relay in this example stops the pump directly on line. Of 

course other start/stop equipment like a soft starter could be 

controlled by the relay output. 

Set view ref. [310] 

Feedback Flow 

time 


Master pump 

Max speed 

[343] 

Upper band 

Transition Speed Stop 

[39G] 

Min speed 

[341] 

Lower band 

Stop delay [39A] 

Settle time stop [39F] 

time 

2nd pump 


Stop ramp depends 

on start method 

Stop command 

time 

(NG_50-PC-20_1) 

Fig. 56 Time sequence stopping an additional pump 



8. EMC and Machine Directive 

8.1 EMC standards 

The variable speed drive complies with the following standards: 

EN(IEC)61800-3:2004 Adjustable speed electronic power 

drive systems, part 3, EMC product standards: 

Standard: category C3, for systems of rated supply voltage< 

1000 VAC, intended for use in the second environment. 

Optional: Category C2, for systems of rated supply voltage 

50 EMC and Machine Directive Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

9. Operation via the Control Panel 

This chapter describes how to use the control panel. The 

VSD can be delivered with a control panel or a blank panel. 

9.1 General 

The control panel displays the status of the VSD and is used 

to set all the parameters. It is also possible to control the 

motor directly from the control panel. The control panel 

can be built-in or located externally via serial communication. 

The VSD can be ordered without the control panel. 

Instead of the control panel there will be a blank panel. 

NOTE: The VSD can run without the control panel being 

connected. However the settings must be such that all 

control signals are set for external use. 

9.2 The control panel 

PREV NEXT ESC 

Fig. 57 Control panel 

9.2.1 The display 

The display is back lit and consists of 2 rows, each with 

space for 16 characters. The display is divided into six areas. 

The different areas in the display are described below: 

A 

LOC/ 

REM 

B 

RESET 

ENTER 

C 

221T 

Motor Volt 

StpA 

M1: 400V 

LC Display 

LEDs 

Control Keys 

Toggle Key 

Function Keys 

Area A: Shows the actual menu number (3 or 4 

digits). 

Area B Shows if the menu is in the toggle loop or the 

VSD is set for Local operation. 

Area C: Shows the heading of the active menu. 

Area D: Shows the status of the VSD (3 digits). 

The following status indications are possible: 

Acc : Acceleration 

Dec : Deceleration 

I 2 t : Active I 2 t protection 

Run : Motor runs 

Trp : Tripped 

Stp : Motor is stopped 

VL : Operating at Voltage limit 

SL : Operating at Speed limit 

CL : Operating at Current limit 

TL : Operating at Torque limit 

OT : Operating at Temperature Limit 

LV : Operating at Low Voltage 

Sby : Operating from Standby power supply 

SST : Operating Safe Stop, is blinking when 

activated 

LCL : Operating with low cooling liquid level 

Area E: Shows active parameter set and if it is a motor 

parameter. 

Area F: Shows the setting or selection in the active menu. 

This area is empty at the 1st level and 2nd level 

menu. This area also shows warnings and alarm 

messages. 

300 Process Appl 

StpA 

Fig. 59 Example 1st level menu 

220 Motor Data 

StpA 

Fig. 60 Example 2nd level menu 

221 Motor Volt 

Stp M1: 400V 

A 

Fig. 61 Example 3d level menu 

D 

E 

Fig. 58 The display 

F 

4161 Max Alarm 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

Fig. 62 Example 4th level menu 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Operation via the Control Panel 51

9.2.2 Indications on the display 

The display can indicate +++ or - - - if a parameter is out of 

range. In the VSD there are parameters which are dependent 

on other parameters. For example, if the speed reference is 

500 and the maximum speed value is set to a value below 

500, this will be indicated with +++ on the display. If the 

minimum speed value is set over 500, - - - is displayed. 

Table 20 

RESET 

Control keys 

RUN L: 

STOP/RESET: 

gives a start with 

left rotation 

stops the motor or resets 

the VSD after a trip 

9.2.3 LED indicators 

The symbols on the control panel have the following functions: 

Run 

Green 

Fig. 63 LED indications 

Table 19 

Symbol 

POWER 

(green) 

LED indication 

Function 

ON BLINKING OFF 

Power on ---------------- Power off 

TRIP (red) VSD tripped Warning/Limit No trip 

RUN 

(green) 

Motor shaft 

rotates 

Trip 

Red 

Motor speed 

increase/ 

decrease 

Power 

Green 

Motor 

stopped 

NOTE: If the control panel is built in, the back light of the 

display has the same function as the Power LED in Table 

19 (Blank panel LEDs). 

9.2.4 Control keys 

The control keys are used to give the Run, Stop or Reset 

commands directly. As default these keys are disabled, set for 

remote control. Activate the control keys by selecting Keyboard 

in the menus Ref Control [214] and Reset Ctrl [216]. 

If the Enable function is programmed on one of the digital 

inputs, this input must be active to allow Run/Stop commands 

from the control panel. 

RUN R: 

gives a start with 

right rotation 

NOTE: It is not possible to simultaneously activate the 

Run/Stop commands from the keyboard and remotely 

from the terminal strip (terminals 1-22). 

9.2.5 The Toggle and Loc/Rem Key 

This key has two functions: Toggle and 

switching between Loc/Rem function. 

LOC/ Press one second to use the toggle function 

REM 

Press and hold the toggle key for more than 

five seconds to switch between Local and Remote function, 

depending on the settings in [2171] and [2172]. 

When editing values, the toggle key can be used to change 

the sign of the value, see section 9.5, page 55. 

Toggle function 

Using the toggle function makes it possible to easily step 

through selected menus in a loop. The toggle loop can contain 

a maximum of ten menus. As default the toggle loop 

contains the menus needed for Quick Setup. You can use the 

toggle loop to create a quick-menu for the parameters that 

are most importance to your specific application. 

NOTE: Do not keep the Toggle key pressed for more than 

five seconds without pressing either the +, - or Esc key, 

as this may activate the Loc/Rem function of this key 

instead. See menu [217]. 

Add a menu to the toggle loop 

1. Go to the menu you want to add to the loop. 

2. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing 

the + key. 

Delete a menu from the toggle loop 

1. Go to the menu you want to delete using the toggle key. 


the - key. 

Delete all menus from the toggle loop 


the Esc key. 

2. Confirm with Enter. The menu Preferred view [100] is 

displayed. 

52 Operation via the Control Panel Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

Default toggle loop 

Fig. 64 shows the default toggle loop. This loop contains the 

necessary menus that need to be set before starting. Press 

Toggle to enter menu [211] then use the Next key to enter 

the sub menus [212] to [21A] and enter the parameters. 

When you press the Toggle key again, menu [221] is displayed. 

100 

511 Toggle loop 211 

341 

LOC/ 

REM 

331 

213 

221 

212 

Sub menus 

NEXT 

222 

Sub menus 

status of the VSD will not change, e.g. Run/Stop conditions 

and the actual speed will remain exactly the same. When the 

VSD is set to Local operation, the display will show L in 

area B in the display. 

The VSD will be started and stopped using the keys on the 

control panel. The reference signal can be controlled using 

the + and - keys on the keyboard, when in the menu [310] 

according to the selection in Keyboard Reference menu 

[369]. 

Remote mode 

When the VSD is switched to REMOTE operation, the 

VSD will be controlled according to selected control methods 

in the menu’s Reference Control [214], Run/Stop Control 

[215] and Reset Control [216]. The actual operation 

status of the VSD will reflect the status and settings of the 

programmed control selections, e.g. Start/Stop status and 

settings of the programmed control selections, acceleration 

or deceleration speed according to the selected reference 

value in the menu Acceleration Time [331] / Deceleration 

Time [332]. 

To monitor the actual Local or Remote status of the VSD 

control, a “Loc/Rem” function is available on the Digital 

Outputs or Relays. When the VSD is set to Local, the signal 

on the DigOut or Relay will be active high, in Remote the 

signal will be inactive low. See menu Digital Outputs [540] 

and Relays [550]. 

NEXT 

228 

Fig. 64 Default toggle loop 

Indication of menus in toggle loop 

Menus included in the toggle loop are indicated with a 

in area B in the display. 

Loc/Rem function 

The Loc/Rem function of this key is disabled as default. 

Enable the function in menu [2171] and/or [2172]. 

With the function Loc/Rem you can change between local 

and remote control of the VSD from the control panel. The 

function Loc/Rem can also be changed via the DigIn, see 

menu Digital inputs [520] 

Change control mode 

1. Press the Loc/Rem key for five seconds, until Local? or 

Remote? is displayed. 

2. Confirm with Enter. 

3. Cancel with Esc. 

Local mode 

Local mode is used for temporary operation. When switched 

to LOCAL operation, the VSD is controlled via the defined 

Local operation mode, i.e. [2171] and [2172]. The actual 

T 


9.2.6 Function keys 

The function keys operate the menus and are also used for 

programming and read-outs of all the menu settings. 

Table 21 

ENTER 

ESC 

Function keys 

ENTER key: 

ESCAPE key: 

- step to a lower menu 

level 

- confirm a changed 

setting 

- step to a higher 

menu level 

- ignore a changed 

setting, without 

confirming 

PREV 

NEXT 

Fig. 65 Menu structure 

9.3 The menu structure 

The menu structure consists of 4 levels: 

Main Menu 

1st level 

2nd level 

3rd level 

4th level 

PREVIOUS key: 

NEXT key: 

- key: 

+ key: 

- step to a previous 

menu within the same 

level 

- go to more significant 

digit in edit mode 

- step to a next menu 

within the same level 

- go to less significant 

digit in edit mode 

- decrease a value 

- change a selection 

- increase a value 

- change a selection 

The first character in the menu number. 

The second character in the menu number. 

The third character in the menu number. 

The fourth character in the menu number. 

This structure is consequently independent of the number 

of menus per level. 

For instance, a menu can have one selectable menu (Set/ 

View Reference Value [310]), or it can have 17 selectable 

menus (menu Speeds [340]). 

4161 

4162 

Fig. 66 Menu structure 

NG_06-F28 

9.3.1 The main menu 

This section gives you a short description of the functions in 

the Main Menu. 

100 Preferred View 

Displayed at power-up. It displays the actual process value as 

default. Programmable for many other read-outs. 

200 Main Setup 

Main settings to get the VSD operable. The motor data settings 

are the most important. Also option utility and settings. 

300 Process and Application Parameters 

Settings more relevant to the application such as Reference 

Speed, torque limitations, PID control settings, etc. 

400 Shaft Power Monitor and Process 

Protection 

The monitor function enables the VSD to be used as a load 

monitor to protect machines and processes against mechanical 

overload and underload. 

NOTE: If there are more than 10 menus within one level, 

the numbering continues in alphabetic order. 


500 Inputs/Outputs and Virtual 

Connections 

All settings for inputs and outputs are entered here. 

600 Logical Functions and Timers 

All settings for conditional signal are entered here. 

700 View Operation and Status 

Viewing all the operational data like frequency, load, power, 

current, etc. 

800 View Trip Log 

Viewing the last 10 trips in the trip memory. 

900 Service Information and VSD Data 

Electronic type label for viewing the software version and 

VSD type. 

9.4 Programming during 

operation 

Most of the parameters can be changed during operation 

without stopping the VSD. Parameters that can not be 

changed are marked with a lock symbol in the display. 

selected character blink. Move the cursor using the Prev or 

Next keys. When you press the + or - keys, the character at 

the cursor position will increase or decrease. This alternative 

is suitable when you want to make large changes, i.e. from 2 

s to 400 s. 

To change the sign of the value, press the toggle key. This 

makes it possible to enter negative values. 

Example: When you press Next the 4 will blink. 

331 Acc Time 

StpA 

4.00s 

Blinking 

Press Enter to save the setting and Esc to leave the edit 

mode. 

9.6 Copy current parameter to 

all sets 

When a parameter is displayed, press the Enter key for 5 seconds. 

Now the text To all sets? is displayed. Press Enter to 

copy the setting for current parameter to all sets. 

NOTE: If you try to change a function during operation 

that only can be changed when the motor is stopped, the 

message “Stop First” is displayed. 

9.5 Editing values in a menu 

Most values in the second row in a menu can be changed in 

two different ways. Enumerated values like the baud rate can 

only be changed with alternative 1. 

2621 Baudrate 

Stp 38400 

Alternative 1 

When you press the + or - keys to change a value, the cursor 

is blinking to the left in the display and the value is increased 

or decreased when you press the appropriate key. If you keep 

the + or - keys pressed, the value will increase or decrease 

continuously. When you keep the key pressed the change 

speed will increase. The Toggle key is used to change the 

sign of the entered value. The sign of the value will also 

change when zero is passed. Press Enter to confirm the value. 

331 Acc Time 

Stp A 2.00s 

Blinking 

Alternative 2 

Press the + or - key to enter edit mode. Then press the Prev 

or Next key to move the cursor to the right most position of 

the value that should be changed. The cursor will make the 


9.7 Programming example 

This example shows how to program a change of the Acc. 

Time set from 2.0 s to 4.0 s. 

The blinking cursor indicates that a change has taken place 

but is not saved yet. If at this moment, the power fails, the 

change will not be saved. 

Use the ESC, Prev, Next or the Toggle keys to proceed and 

to go to other menus. 

100 0rpm 

Stp A 0.0A 

NEXT 

200 MAIN SETUP 

StpA 

Menu 100 appears 

after power-up. 

Press Next for menu 

[200]. 

NEXT 

300 Process 

StpA 

Press Next for menu 

[300]. 

ENTER 

310 Set/View Ref 

StpA 

Press Enter for menu 

[310]. 

NEXT 

330 Run/Stop 

StpA 

Press Next two times 

for menu [330]. 

ENTER 

331 Acc Time 

StpA 

2.00s 

Press Enter for menu 

[331]. 

331 Acc Time 

Stp A 2.00s 

Blinking 

Keep key pressed 

until desired value has 

been reached. 

ENTER 

331 Acc Time 

StpA 

4.00s 

Fig. 67 Programming example 

Save the changed 

value by pressing 

Enter. 


10. Serial communication 

The VSD provides possibility for different types of serial 

communication. 

• Modbus RTU via RS232/485 

• Fieldbuses as Profibus DP and DeviceNet 

• Industrial Ethernet type Modbus/TCP 

10.1 Modbus RTU 

The VSD has an asynchronous serial communication interface 

behind the control panel. The protocol used for data 

exchange is based in the Modbus RTU protocol, originally 

developed by Modicon. the physical connection is RS232. 

The VSD acts as a slave with address 1 in a master-slave configuration. 

The communication is half-duplex. It has a 

standard no return zero (NRZ) format. 

The baud rate is fixed to 9600. 

The character frame format (always 11 bits) has: 

• one start bit 

• eight data bits 

• two stop bits 

• no parity 

It is possible to temporarily connect a personal computer 

with for example the software EmoSoftCom (programming 

and monitoring software) to the RS232 connector on the 

control panel. This can be useful when copying parameters 

between variable speed drives etc. For permanent connection 

of a personal computer you have to use one of the communication 

option boards. 

NOTE: This RS232 port is not isolated. 

Fig. 68 Mounting frame for the control panel 

10.2 Parameter sets 

Communication information for the different parameter 

sets. 

The different parameter sets in the VSD have the following 

DeviceNet instance numbers and Profibus slot/index numbers: 

Parameter 

set 

Modbus/DeviceNet 

Instance number 

Profibus 

Slot/Index 

A 43001–43556 168/160 to 170/205 

B 44001–44529 172/140 to 174/185 

C 45001–45529 176/120 to 178/165 

D 46001–46529 180/100 to 182/145 

Correct and safe use of a RS232 connection 

depends on the ground pins of both ports 

being the same potential. Problems can 

occur when connecting two ports of e.g. 

machinery and computers where both ground pins are 

not the same potential. This may cause hazardous 

ground loops that can destroy the RS232 ports. 

The control panel RS232 connection is not galvanic 

isolated. 

Parameter set A contains parameters 43001 to 43556. The 

parameter sets B, C and D contains the same type of information. 

For example parameter 43123 in parameter set A 

contain the same type of information as 44123 in parameter 

set B. 

A DeviceNet instance number can easily be converted into a 

Profibus slot/index number according to description in section 

section 11.8.2, page 148. 

The optional RS232/485 card from Emotron is galvanic 

isolated. 

Note that the control panel RS232 connection can 

safely be used in combination with commercial available 

isolated USB to RS232 converters. 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Serial communication 57

10.3 Motor data 

Communication information for the different motors. 

Motor 



Profibus 

Slot/Index 

M1 43041–43048 168/200 to 168/207 

M2 44041–44048 172/180 to 174/187 

M3 45041–45048 176/160 to 176/167 

M4 46041–46048 180/140 to 180/147 

M1 contains parameters 43041 to 43048. The M2, M3, and 

M4 contains the same type of information. For example 

parameter 43043 in motor M1 contain the same type of 

information as 44043 in M2. 

A DeviceNet instance number can easily be converted into a 

Profibus slot/index number according to description in section 

section 11.8.2, page 148. 

10.4 Start and stop commands 

Set start and stop commands via serial communication. 



Integer 

value 

42901 0 Reset 

42902 1 

42903 2 RunR 

42904 3 RunL 

Function 

Run, active together with 

either RunR or RunL to 

perform start. 

10.5 Reference signal 

The reference value is set in modbus number 42905. 0-4000 

h corresponds to 0-100% of actual reference value. 

10.6 Description of the EInt 

formats 

Modbus parameters can have different formats e.g. a standard 

unsigned/signed integer, or eint. EInt, which is described 

below. All parameters written to a register may be rounded 

to the number of significant digits used in the internal system. 

If a parameter is in Eint format, the 16 bit number should 

be interpreted like this: 

F EEEE MMMMMMMMMMM 

F 

Format bit: 

0=Unsinged integer mode, 

1=Eint mode 

EEEE 

2 complement signed 

exponent 

MMMMMMMMMMM 2 complement signed 

mantissa. 

If the format bit is 0, then can a positive number 0-32767 be 

represented by bit 0-14. 

If the format bit is 1, then is the number interpreted as this: 

Value = M * 10^E 

Example 

If you write the value 1004 to a register and this register has 

3 significant digits, it will be stored as 1000. 

In the Emotron floating point format (F=1), one 16-bit 

word is used to represent large (or very small numbers) with 

3 significant digits. 

If data is read or written as a fixed point (i.e. no decimals) 

number between 0-32767, the Emotron 15-bit fixed point 

format (F=0) may be used. 

F=Format. 1=Emotron floating point format, 0=15 bit 

Emotron 15-bit fixed point format. 

The matrix below describes the contents of the 16-bit word 

for the two different EInt formats: 

B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 

F=1 e3 e2 e1 e0 m10 m9 m8 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 

F=0 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 

58 Serial communication Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

Example of Emotron floating point format 

e3-e0 4-bit signed exponent. 

-8..+7 (binary 1000 .. 0111) 

m10-m0 11-bit signed mantissa. 

-1024..+1023 (binary 

10000000000..01111111111) 

A signed number should be represented as a two complement 

binary number, like below: 

Value Binary 

-8 1000 

-7 1001 

.. 

-2 1110 

-1 1111 

0 0000 

1 0001 

2 0010 

.. 

6 0110 

7 0111 

The value represented by the EInt floating point format is 

m·10 e . 

To convert a value from the EInt floating point format to a 

floating point value, use the formula above. 

To convert a floating point value to the EInt floating point 

format, see the code float_to_eint below. 

Example 

The number 1.23 would be represented by this in EInt 

F EEEE MMMMMMMMMMM 

1 1110 00001111011 

F=1 -> Eint 

E=-2 

M=123 

The value is then 123x10 -2 = 1.23 


Programming example: 

typedef struct 

{ 

int m:11; // mantissa, -1024..1023 

int e: 4; // exponent -8..7 

unsigned int f: 1; // format, 1->special emoint format 

} eint16; 

//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

unsigned short int float_to_eint16(float value) 

{ 

eint16 etmp; 

int dec=0; 

while (floor(value) != value && dec=0 && value=-1000 && value=0) 

etmp.m=1; // Set sign 

else 

etmp.m=-1; // Set sign 

value=fabs(value); 

while (value>1000) 

{ 

etmp.e++; // increase exponent 

value=value/10; 

} 

value+=0.5; // round 

etmp.m=etmp.m*value; // make signed 

} 

Rreturn (*(unsigned short int *)&etmp); 

} 

//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

float eint16_to_float(unsigned short int value) 

{ 

float f; 

eint16 evalue; 

evalue=*(eint16 *)&value; 

if (evalue.f) 

{ 

if (evalue.e>=0) 

f=(int)evalue.m*pow10(evalue.e); 

else 

f=(int)evalue.m/pow10(abs(evalue.e)); 

} 

else 

f=value; 

return f; 

} 

//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 


Example Emotron 15-bit fixed point format 

The value 72.0 can be represented as the fixed point number 

72. It is within the range 0-32767, which means that the 15- 

bit fixed point format may be used. 

The value will then be represented as: 

B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 

Where bit 15 indicates that we are using the fixed point format 

(F=0). 



11. Functional Description 

This chapter describes the menus and parameters in the software. 

You will find a short description of each function and 

information about default values, ranges, etc. There are also 

tables containing communication information. You will find 

the Modbus, DeviceNet and Fieldbus address for each 

parameter as well as the enumeration for the data. 

NOTE: Functions marked with the sign 

changed during Run Mode. 

Description of table layout 

Default: 

Selection or 

range 

cannot be 

Resolution of settings 

The resolution for all range settings described in this chapter 

is 3 significant digits. Exceptions are speed values which are 

presented with 4 significant digits. Table 22 shows the resolutions 

for 3 significant digits. 

Table 22 

Integer value of 

selection 

Description 

3 Digit Resolution 

0.01-9.99 0.01 

10.0-99.9 0.1 

100-999 1 

1000-9990 10 

10000-99900 100 

 

Menu no. Menu name 

Status Selected value 

11.1 Preferred View [100] 

This menu is displayed at every power-up. During operation, 

the menu [100] will automatically be displayed when 

the keyboard is not operated for 5 minutes. The automatic 

return function will be switched off when the Toggle and 

Stop key is pressed simultaneously. As default it displays the 

actual current. 

100 (1st Line) 

Stp A (2nd Line) 

Fig. 69 Display functions 

11.1.1 1st Line [110] 

Sets the content of the upper row in the menu [100] Preferred 

View. 

Default: 

Dependent on menu 

Process Val 

Process Val 0 Process value 

Speed 1 Speed 

Torque 2 Torque 

Process Ref 3 Process reference 

Shaft Power 4 Shaft power 

El Power 5 Electrical power 

Current 6 Current 

Output volt 7 Output voltage 

Frequency 8 Frequency 

DC Voltage 9 DC voltage 

Heatsink Tmp 10 Heatsink temperature 

Motor Temp 11 Motor temperature 

VSD Status 12 VSD status 

Run Time 13 Run Time 

Energy 14 Energy 

Mains Time 15 Mains time 





Modbus format 

110 1st Line 

StpA 

Process Val 

UInt 

UInt 

100 0rpm 

Stp A 0.0A 

Menu [100], Preferred View displays the settings made in 

menu [110], 1st line, and [120], 2nd line. See Fig. 69. 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Functional Description 63

11.1.2 2nd Line [120] 

Sets the content of the lower row in the menu [100] Preferred 

View. Same selection as in menu [110]. 

Default: 

Current 

11.2 Main Setup [200] 

The Main Setup menu contains the most important settings 

to get the VSD operational and set up for the application. It 

includes different sub menus concerning the control of the 

unit, motor data and protection, utilities and automatic 

resetting of faults. This menu will instantaneously be 

adapted to build in options and show the required settings. 

11.2.1 Operation [210] 

Selections concerning the used motor, VSD mode, control 

signals and serial communication are described in this submenu 

and is used to set the VSD up for the application. 

Language [211] 

Select the language used on the LC Display. Once the language 

is set, this selection will not be affected by the Load 

Default command. 

Default: 

English 

English 0 English selected 

Svenska 1 Swedish selected 

Nederlands 2 

Dutch selected 

Deutsch 3 German selected 

Français 4 French selected 

Español 5 Spanish selected 

Руccкий 6 Russian selected 

Italiano 7 Italian selected 

Česky 8 Czech selected 





Modbus format 

120 2nd Line 

StpA 

Current 

211 Language 

Stp A English 

UInt 

UInt 

Select Motor [212] 

This menu is used if you have more than one motor in your 

application. Select the motor to define. It is possible to 

define up to four different motors, M1 to M4, in the VSD. 

Default: 

M1 0 

M2 1 

M3 2 

M4 3 

M1 


Drive Mode [213] 

This menu is used to set the control mode for the motor. 

Settings for the reference signals and read-outs is made in 

menu Process source, [321]. 

• V/Hz Mode (output speed [712] in rpm) . 


Motor Data is connected to selected 

motor. 




Modbus format 

Default: 

V/Hz 2 

V/Hz 

UInt 

UInt 

All control loops are related to frequency 

control. In this mode multi-motor applications 

are possible. 

NOTE: All the functions and menu readouts 

with regard to speed and rpm (e.g. 

Max Speed = 1500 rpm, Min Speed=0 

rpm, etc.) remain speed and rpm, 

although they represent the output 

frequency. 




Modbus format 

212 Select Motor 

StpA 

M1 

213 Drive Mode 

StpA 

V/Hz 

UInt 

UInt 

64 Functional Description Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

Reference control [214] 

To control the speed of the motor, the VSD needs a reference 

signal. This reference signal can be controlled by a 

remote source from the installation, the keyboard of the 

VSD, or by serial or fieldbus communication. Select the 

required reference control for the application in this menu. 

Default: 

Remote 0 

Keyboard 1 

Com 2 

Option 3 

Remote 


The reference signal comes from the analogue 

inputs of the terminal strip (terminals 

1-22). 

Reference is set with the + and - keys on 

the Control Panel. Can only be done in 

menu Set/View reference [310]. 

The reference is set via the serial communication 

(RS 485, Fieldbus.) See section 

section 10.5 for further information. 

The reference is set via an option. Only 

available if the option can control the reference 

value. 

NOTE: If the reference is switched from Remote to 

Keyboard, the last remote reference value will be the 

default value for the control panel. 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

Run/Stop Control [215] 

This function is used to select the source for run and stop 

commands. Start/stop via analogue signals can be achieved 

by combining a few functions. This is described in the 

Chapter 7. page 33. 

Default: 

214 Ref Control 

StpA 

Remote 

215 Run/Stp Ctrl 

StpA 

Remote 

Remote 

Remote 0 

The start/stop signal comes from the digital 

inputs of the terminal strip (terminals 1-22). 

Keyboard 1 Start and stop is set on the Control Panel. 

Com 2 

The start/stop is set via the serial communication 

(RS 485, Fieldbus.) See Fieldbus or 

RS232/485 option manual for details. 

Option 3 The start/stop is set via an option. 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Reset Control [216] 

When the VSD is stopped due to a failure, a reset command 

is required to make it possible to restart the VSD. Use this 

function to select the source of the reset signal. 

Default: 

Remote 0 

Keyboard 1 

Com 2 

Remote + 

Keyb 

Com + 

Keyb 

Rem+Keyb 

+Com 

3 

4 

5 

Option 6 

Remote 


216 Reset Ctrl 

StpA 

Remote 

The command comes from the inputs of 

the terminal strip (terminals 1-22). 

The command comes from the command 

keys of the Control Panel. 

The command comes from the serial 

communication (RS 485, Fieldbus). 


the terminal strip (terminals 1-22) or the 

keyboard. 

The command comes from the serial 

communication (RS485, Fieldbus) or the 

keyboard. 


the terminal strip (terminals 1-22), the 

keyboard or the serial communication 

(RS485, Fieldbus). 

The command comes from an option. 

Only available if the option can control 

the reset command. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Local/Remote key function [217] 

The Toggle key on the keyboard, see section 9.2.5, page 52, 

has two functions and is activated in this menu. As default 

the key is just set to operate as a Toggle key that moves you 

easily through the menus in the toggle loop. The second 

function of the key allows you to easily swap between Local 

and normal operation (set up via [214] and [215]) of the 

VSD. Local mode can also be activated via a digital input. If 

both [2171] and [2172] is set to Standard, the function is 

disabled. 


Default: 

Standard 

Standard 0 Local reference control set via [214] 

Remote 1 Local reference control via remote 

Keyboard 2 Local reference control via keyboard 

Com 3 Local reference control via communication 





Modbus format 

Default: 

Standard 


UInt 

UInt 

Standard 0 Local Run/Stop control set via [215] 

Remote 1 Local Run/Stop control via remote 

Keyboard 2 Local Run/Stop control via keyboard 

Com 3 Local Run/Stop control via communication 




Modbus format 

2171 LocRefCtrl 

StpA 

Standard 

2172 LocRunCtrl 

StpA 

Standard 

UInt 

UInt 

Lock Code [218] 

To prevent the keyboard being used or to change the setup 

of the VSD and/or process control, the keyboard can be 

locked with a password. This menu, Lock Code [218], is 

used to lock and unlock the keyboard. Enter the password 

“291” to lock/unlock the keyboard operation. If the keyboard 

is not locked (default) the selection “Lock Code?” will 

appear. If the keyboard is already locked, the selection 

“Unlock Code?” will appear. 

When the keyboard is locked, parameters can be viewed but 

not changed. The reference value can be changed and the 

VSD can be started, stopped and reversed if these functions 

are set to be controlled from the keyboard. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0–9999 

Rotation [219] 

Overall limitation of motor rotation direction 

This function limits the overall rotation, either to left or 

right or both directions. This limit is prior to all other selections, 

e.g.: if the rotation is limited to right, a Run-Left command 

will be ignored. To define left and right rotation we 

assume that the motor is connected U-U, V-V and W-W. 

Speed Direction and Rotation 

The speed direction can be controlled by: 

• RunR/RunL commands on the control panel. 

• RunR/RunL commands on the terminal strip 

(terminals 1-22). 

• Via the serial interface options. 

• The parameter sets. 

Fig. 70 Rotation 

In this menu you set the general rotation for the motor. 

Default: 

R 1 

L 2 

218 Lock Code 

Stp 0 

A 

219 Rotation 

StpA 

R + L 

Speed direction is limited to right rotation. 

The input and key RunL are disabled. 

Speed direction is limited to left rotation. 

The input and key RunR are disabled. 

R+L 3 Both speed directions allowed. 

Right 

Left 

R+L 






Modbus format 

11.2.2 Remote Signal Level/Edge 

[21A] 

In this menu you select the way to control the inputs for 

RunR, RunL, Stop and Reset that are operated via the digital 

inputs on the terminal strip. The inputs are default set 

for level-control, and will be active as long as the input is 

made and kept high. When edge-control is selected, the 

input will be activated by the low to high transition of the 

input. 

Default: 

Level 0 

Edge 1 

Level 


UInt 

UInt 

The inputs are activated or deactivated 

by a continuous high or low signal. Is 

commonly used if, for example, a PLC is 

used to operate the VSD. 

The inputs are activated by a transition; 

for Run and Reset from “low” to “high”, 

for Stop from “high” to “low”. 




Modbus format 

! 

21A Level/Edge 

StpA 

Level 

UInt 

UInt 

CAUTION: Level controlled inputs DO NOT 

comply with the Machine Directive if the inputs 

are directly used to start and stop the machine. 

NOTE: Edge controlled inputs can comply with the 

Machine Directive (see the Chapter 8. page 49) if the 

inputs are directly used to start and stop the machine. 

11.2.3 Mains supply voltage [21B] 

WARNING: This menu must be set according 

to the VSD product lable and the supply 

voltage used. Wrong setting might damage 

the VSD or brake resistor. 

In this menu the nominal mains supply voltage connected to 

the VSD can be selected. The setting will be valid for all 

parameter sets. The default setting, Not defined, is never 

selectable and is only visible until a new value is selected. 

Once the supply voltage is set, this selection will not be 

affected by the Load Default command [243]. 

Brake chopper activation level is adjusted using the setting 

of [21B]. 

NOTE: The setting is affected by the Load from CP 

command [245] and if loading parameter file via 

EmoSoftCom. 

Default: 

Not Defined 0 

Not defined 


Inverter default value used. Only valid if 

this parameter is never set. 

220-240 V 1 Only valid for FDU40/48 

380-415 V 3 Only valid for FDU40/48/50 



550-600 V 6 Only valid for FDU69 

660-690 V 7 Only valid for FDU69 




Modbus format 

21B Supply Volts 

StpA 

Not defined 

UInt 

UInt 

11.2.4 Motor Data [220] 

In this menu you enter the motor data to adapt the VSD to 

the connected motor. This will increase the control accuracy 

as well as different read-outs and analogue output signals. 

Motor M1 is selected as default and motor data entered will 

be valid for motor M1. If you have more than one motor 

you need to select the correct motor in menu [212] before 

entering motor data. 

NOTE: The parameters for motor data cannot be 

changed during run mode. 


NOTE: The default settings are for a standard 4-pole 

motor according to the nominal power of the VSD. 

NOTE: Parameter set cannot be changed during run if 

the sets is set for different motors. 

NOTE: Motor Data in the different sets M1 to M4 can be 

revert to default setting in menu [243], Default>Set. 

Motor Voltage [221] 

Set the nominal motor voltage. 

Default: 

Range: 

Resolution 

WARNING: Enter the correct motor data to 

prevent dangerous situations and assure 

correct control. 

 

400 V for FDU40 and 48 

500 V for FDU50 and 52 

690 V for FDU69 

100-700 V 

1 V 

NOTE: The Motor Volts value will always be stored as a 3 

digit value with a resolution of 1 V. 





Modbus format 

Motor Frequency [222] 

Set the nominal motor frequency. 

 

221 Motor Volts 

Stp M1: 400V 

A 

Long, 

1=0.1 V 

EInt 

222 Motor Freq 

Stp M1: 50Hz 

A 





Modbus format 

Motor Power [223] 

Set the nominal motor power. 

Default: 

Range: 

Resolution 

P NOM VSD 

1W-120% x P NOM 

3 significant digits 


P NOM is the nominal VSD power. 

Motor Current [224] 

Set the nominal motor current. 


Long, 1=1 Hz 

EInt 

NOTE: The Motor Power value will always be stored as a 

3 digit value in W up to 999 W and in kW for all higher 

powers. 




Modbus format 

Long, 

1=1 W 

EInt 

Default: I NOM (see note section 11.2.4, page 67) 

Range: 

 

 

223 Motor Power 

Stp M1: (P NOM )kW 

A 

224 Motor Curr 

Stp M1: (I NOM )A 

A 

25 - 150% x I NOM 

Default: 

Range: 

Resolution 

50 Hz 

24-300 Hz 

1 Hz 




Modbus format 

Long, 

1=0.1 A 

EInt 

I NOM is the nominal VSD current 


Motor Speed [225] 

Set the nominal asynchronous motor speed. 

Motor Cos ϕ [227] 

Set the nominal Motor cosphi (power factor). 

 

225 Motor Speed 

StpA 

M1: (n MOT )rpm 

 

227 Motor Cosϕ 

Stp M1: A 

Default: n MOT (see note section 11.2.4, page 67) 

Range: 50 - 18000 rpm 

Resolution 1 rpm, 4 sign digits 

WARNING: Do NOT enter a synchronous (noload) 

motor speed. 

NOTE: Maximum speed [343] is not automatically 

changed when the motor speed is changed. 

NOTE: Entering a wrong, too low value can cause a 

dangerous situation for the driven application due to 

high speeds. 





Modbus format 

Motor Poles [226] 

When the nominal speed of the motor is ≤500 rpm, the 

additional menu for entering the number of poles, [226], 

appears automatically. In this menu the actual pole number 

can be set which will increase the control accuracy of the 

VSD. 

 

Default: 4 

Range: 2-144 


UInt 

1=1 rpm 

UInt 




Modbus format 

226 Motor Poles 

Stp M1: 4 

A 

Long, 1=1 pole 

EInt 

Default: P NOM (see note section 11.2.4, page 67) 

Range: 0.50 - 1.00 




Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 

Modbus format 

Motor ventilation [228] 

Parameter for setting the type of motor ventilation. Affects 

the characteristics of the I 2 t motor protection by lowering 

the actual overload current at lower speeds. 

Default: 

 

Self 

None 0 Limited I 2 t overload curve. 


EInt 

Self 1 Normal I2 t overload curve. Means that the 

motor stands lower current at low speed. 

Forced 2 

Expanded I 2 t overload curve. Means that the 

motor stands almost the whole current also 

at lower speed. 




Modbus format 

228 Motor Vent 

Stp M1: Self 

A 

UInt 

UInt 

When the motor has no cooling fan, None is selected and 

the current level is limited to 55% of rated motor current. 

With a motor with a shaft mounted fan, Self is selected and 

the current for overload is limited to 87% from 20% of synchronous 

speed. At lower speed, the overload current 

allowed will be smaller. 

When the motor has an external cooling fan, Forced is 

selected and the overload current allowed starts at 90% from 

rated motor current at zero speed, up to nominal motor current 

at 70% of synchronous speed. 


Fig. 71 shows the characteristics with respect for Nominal 

Current and Speed in relation to the motor ventilation type 

selected. 

NOTE: To run the VSD it is not mandatory for the ID RUN 

to be executed, but without it the performance will not 

be optimal. 

xI nom for I 2 t 

1.00 

0.90 

0.87 

0.55 

Fig. 71 I 2 t curves 

Motor Identification Run [229] 

This function is used when the VSD is put into operation 

for the first time. To achieve an optimal control performance, 

fine tuning of the motor parameters using a motor ID 

run is needed. During the test run the display shows “Test 

Run” blinking. 

To activate the Motor ID run, select “Short” and press 

Enter. Then press RunL or RunR on the control panel to 

start the ID run. If menu [219] Rotation is set to L the 

RunR key is inactive and vice versa. The ID run can be 

aborted by giving a Stop command via the control panel or 

Enable input. The parameter will automatically return to 

OFF when the test is completed. The message “Test Run 

OK!” is displayed. Before the VSD can be operated normally 

again, press the STOP/RESET key on the control panel. 

During the Short ID run the motor shaft does not rotate. 

The VSD measures the rotor and stator resistance. 

. 

Default: 

Forced 

Self 

None 

0.20 0.70 2.00 

xSync Speed 

 

Off, see Note 

Off 0 Not active 

Short 1 


Parameters are measured with injected DC 

current. No rotation of the shaft will occur. 




Modbus format 

229 Motor ID-Run 

Stp M1: Off 

A 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: If the ID Run is aborted or not completed the 

message “Interrupted!” will be displayed. The previous 

data do not need to be changed in this case. Check that 

the motor data are correct. 

Motor Sound [22A] 

Sets the sound characteristic of the VSD output stage by 

changing the switching frequency and/or pattern. Generally 

the motor noise will go down at higher switching frequencies. 

Default: 


F 

E 0 Switching frequency 1.5 kHz 

F 1 Switching frequency 3 kHz 

G 2 Switching frequency 6 kHz 

H 3 

Switching frequency 6 kHz, random frequency 

(+750 Hz) 




Modbus format 

 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: At switching frequencies >3 kHz derating may 

become necessary. If the heat sink temperature gets too 

high the switching frequency is decreased to avoid 

tripping. This is done automatically in the VSD. The 

default switching frequency is 3 kHz. 

Encoder Feedback [22B] 

Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. This 

parameter enables or disables the encoder feedback from the 

motor to the VSD. 

 

22A Motor Sound 

Stp M1: F 

A 

22B Encoder 

Stp M1: Off 

A 

Default: Off 

On 0 Encoder feedback enabled 

Off 1 Encoder feedback disabled 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Encoder Pulses [22C] 


parameter describes the number of pulses per rotation for 

your encoder, i.e. it is encoder specific. For more information 

please see the encoder manual. 

 

Default: 1024 

Range: 5–16384 





Long, 1=1 pulse 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Encoder Speed [22D] 


parameter shows the measured motor speed. To check if the 

encoder is correctly installed, set Encoder [23B] to Off, run 

the VSD at any speed and compare with the value in this 

menu. The value in this menu [22D] should be about the 

same as the motor speed [712]. If you get the wrong sign for 

the value, swap encoder input A and B. 

 

22C Enc Pulses 

Stp M1: 1024 

A 

22D Enc Speed 

Stp M1: XXrpm 

A 

11.2.5 Motor Protection [230] 

This function protects the motor against overload based on 

the standard IEC 60947-4-2. 

Motor I 2 t Type [231] 

The motor protection function makes it possible to protect 

the motor from overload as published in the standard IEC 

60947-4-2. It does this using Motor I2t Current, [232] as a 

reference. The Motor I2t Time [233] is used to define the 

time behaviour of the function. The current set in [232] can 

be delivered infinite in time. If for instance in [233] a time 

of 1000 s is chosen the upper curve of Fig. 72 is valid. The 

value on the x-axis is the multiple of the current chosen in 

[232]. The time [233] is the time that an overloaded motor 

is switched off or is reduced in power at 1.2 times the current 

set in [232]. 

Default: Trip 

Off 0 I 2 t motor protection is not active. 

Trip 1 

Limit 2 


When the I 2 t time is exceeded, the VSD will 

trip on “Motor I 2 t”. 

This mode helps to keep the inverter running 

when the Motor I2t function is just 

before tripping the VSD. The trip is 

replaced by current limiting with a maximum 

current level set by the value out of 

the menu [232]. In this way, if the reduced 

current can drive the load, the VSD continues 

running. 




Modbus format 

231 Mot I 2 t Type 

Stp M1: Trip 

A 

UInt 

UInt 

Unit: 

Resolution: 

rpm 

speed measured via the encoder 

NOTE: When Mot I2t Type=Limit, the VSD can control the 

speed < MinSpeed to reduce the motor current. 





Modbus format 

Int 

Int 


Motor I 2 t Current [232] 

Sets the current limit for the motor I 2 t protection. 

Default: 

Range: 

100% of I MOT 

0–150% of I MOT 




Fieldbus format Long, 1=1% 

Modbus format 

232 Mot I 2 t Curr 

Stp 100% 

A 

EInt 

NOTE: When the selection Limit is set in menu [231], the 

value must be above the no-load current of the motor. 

Motor I 2 t Time [233] 

Sets the time of the I 2 t function. After this time the limit for 

the I 2 t is reached if operating with 120% of the I 2 t current 

value. Valid when start from 0 rpm. 

NOTE: Not the time constant of the motor. 

Default: 

Range: 

60 s 

60–1200 s 





Modbus format 

233 Mot I 2 t Time 

Stp M1: 60s 

A 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

100000 

10000 

t [s] 

1000 

1000 s (120%) 

100 

240 s (120%) 

480 s (120%) 

60 s (120%) 

120 s (120%) 

10 

Fig. 72 I 2 t function 

1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 

Actual output current/ I 2 t-current 

i / I2t-current 


Fig. 72 shows how the function integrates the square of the 

motor current according to the Mot I 2 t Curr [232] and the 

Mot I 2 t Time [233]. 

When the selection Trip is set in menu [231] the VSD trips 

if this limit is exceeded. 

When the selection Limit is set in menu [231] the VSD 

reduces the torque if the integrated value is 95% or closer to 

the limit, so that the limit cannot be exceeded. 

NOTE: If it is not possible to reduce the current, the VSD 

will trip after exceeding 110% of the limit. 

Example 

In Fig. 72 the thick grey line shows the following example. 

• Menu [232] Mot I 2 t Curr is set to 100%. 

1.2 x 100% = 120% 

• Menu [233] Mot I 2 t Time is set to 1000 s. 

This means that the VSD will trip or reduce after 1000 s if 

the current is 1.2 times of 100% nominal motor current. 

Thermal Protection [234] 

Only visible if the PTC/PT100 option board is installed. Set 

the PTC input for thermal protection of the motor. The 

motor thermistors (PTC) must comply with DIN 44081/ 

44082. Please refer to the manual for the PTC/PT100 

option board. 

Menu [234] PTC contains functions to enable or disable the 

PTC input. 

Default: 

Off 0 

PTC 1 

PT100 2 

PTC+PT100 3 

Off 


PTC and PT100 motor protection are disabled. 

Enables the PTC protection of the motor 

via the insulated option board. 

Enables the PT100 protection for the 

motor via the insulated option board. 

Enables the PTC protection as well as the 

PT100 protection for the motor via the 

insulated option board. 




Modbus format 

234 Thermal Prot 

StpA 

Off 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: PTC option and PT100 selections can only be 

selected when the option board is mounted. 

Motor Class [235] 

Only visible if the PTC/PT100 option board is installed. Set 

the class of motor used. The trip levels for the PT100 sensor 

will automatically be set according to the setting in this 

menu. 

Default: F 140°C 

A 100°C 0 

E 115°C 1 

B 120°C 2 

F 140°C 3 

F Nema 145°C 4 

H 165°C 5 





Modbus format 

NOTE: This menu is only valid for PT 100. 

UInt 

UInt 

PT100 Inputs [236] 

Sets which of PT100 inputs that should be used for thermal 

protection. Deselecting not used PT100 inputs on the PTC/ 

PT100 option board in order to ignore those inputs, i.e. 

extra external wiring is not needed if port is not used. 

Default: PT100 1+2+3 

Selection: 

PT100 1, PT100 2, PT100 1+2, PT100 

3, PT100 1+3, PT100 2+3, PT100 

1+2+3 

PT100 1 1 Channel 1 used for PT100 protection 


PT100 1+2 3 Channel 1+2 used for PT100 protection 




PT100 1+2+3 7 

235 Mot Class 

Stp F 140°C 

A 

236 PT100 Inputs 

Stp PT100 1+2+3 

A 

Channel 1+2+3 used for PT100 protection 






Modbus format 

Motor PTC [237] 

In this menu the internal motor PTC hardware option is 

enabled. This PTC input complies with DIN 44081/44082. 

Please refer to the manual for the PTC/PT100 option board 

for electrical specification. 

This menu is only visible if a PTC (or resistor

The active set can be viewed with function [721] FI status. 

NOTE: Parameter set cannot be changed during run if 

this also would imply a change of the motor set (M2- 

M4). 

Copy Set [242] 

This function copies the content of a parameter set into 

another parameter set. 

Default: A>B 

A>B 0 Copy set A to set B 

A>C 1 Copy set A to set C 

A>D 2 Copy set A to set D 

B>A 3 Copy set B to set A 

B>C 4 Copy set B to set C 

B>D 5 Copy set B to set D 

C>A 6 Copy set C to set A 

C>B 7 Copy set C to set B 

C>D 8 Copy set C to set D 

D>A 9 Copy set D to set A 

D>B 10 Copy set D to set B 

D>C 11 Copy set D to set C 





Modbus format 

242 Copy Set 

StpA 

A>B 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: The actual value of menu [310] will not be copied 

into the other set. 

Default: 

A 0 

B 1 

C 2 

D 3 

ABCD 4 

Factory 5 

M1 6 

M2 7 

M3 8 

M4 9 

M1234 10 


A 

Only the selected parameter set will revert 

to its default settings. 

All four parameter sets will revert to the 

default settings. 

All settings, except [211], [221]-[22D], 

[261], [3A1] and [923], will revert to the 


Only the selected motor set will revert to its 


All four motor sets will revert to default settnings. 




Modbus format 

243 Default>Set 

StpA 

A 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: Trip log hour counter and other VIEW ONLY menus 

are not regarded as settings and will be unaffected. 

NOTE: If “Factory” is selected, the message “Sure?” is 

displayed. Press the + key to display “Yes” and then 

Enter to confirm. 

NOTE: The parameters in menu [220], Motor data, are 

not affected by loading defaults when restoring 

parameter sets A–D. 

A>B means that the content of parameter set A is copied 

into parameter set B. 

Load Default Values Into Set [243] 

With this function three different levels (factory settings) 

can be selected for the four parameter sets. When loading 

the default settings, all changes made in the software are set 

to factory settings. This function also includes selections for 

loading default settings to the four different Motor Data 

Sets. 

Copy All Settings to Control Panel [244] 

All the settings can be copied into the control panel including 

the motor data. Start commands will be ignored during 

copying. 

Default: 

 

No Copy 

No Copy 0 Nothing will be copied 

Copy 1 Copy all settings 

244 Copy to CP 

StpA 

No Copy 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

NOTE: The actual value of menu [310] will not be copied 

into control panel memory set. 

NOTE: Loading from the control panel will not affect the 

value in menu [310]. 

Load Settings from Control Panel [245] 

This function can load all four parameter sets from the control 

panel to the VSD. Parameter sets from the source VSD 

are copied to all parameter sets in the target VSD, i.e. A to 

A, B to B, C to C and D to D. 

Start commands will be ignored during loading. 

Default: 

No Copy 

No Copy 0 Nothing will be loaded. 

A 1 Data from parameter set A is loaded. 

B 2 Data from parameter set B is loaded. 

C 3 Data from parameter set C is loaded. 

D 4 Data from parameter set D is loaded. 

ABCD 5 

A+Mot 6 

B+Mot 7 

C+Mot 8 

D+Mot 9 

 

ABCD+Mot 10 

245 Load from CP 

StpA 

No Copy 

Data from parameter sets A, B, C and D are 

loaded. 

Parameter set A and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter set B and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter set C and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter set D and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter sets A, B, C, D and Motor data 

are loaded. 

M1 11 Data from motor 1 is loaded. 




M1M2M3 

M4 

15 Data from motor 1, 2, 3 and 4 are loaded. 

All 16 All data is loaded from the control panel. 

11.2.7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions 

[250] 

The benefit of this feature is that occasional trips that do not 

affect the process will be automatically reset. Only when the 

failure keeps on coming back, recurring at defined times and 

therefore cannot be solved by the VSD, will the unit give an 

alarm to inform the operator that attention is required. 

For all trip functions that can be activated by the user you 

can select to control the motor down to zero speed according 

to set deceleration ramp to avoid water hammer. 

Also see section 12.2, page 152. 

Autoreset example: 

In an application it is known that the main supply voltage 

sometimes disappears for a very short time, a so-called “dip”. 

That will cause the VSD to trip an “Undervoltage alarm”. 

Using the Autoreset function, this trip will be acknowledged 

automatically. 

• Enable the Autoreset function by making the reset input 

continuously high. 

• Activate the Autoreset function in the menu [251], 

Number of trips. 

• Select in menus [252] to [25N] the Trip condition that 

are allowed to be automatically reset by the Autoreset 

function after the set delay time has expired. 

Number of Trips [251] 

Any number set above 0 activates the Autoreset. This means 

that after a trip, the VSD will restart automatically according 

to the number of attempts selected. No restart attempts will 

take place unless all conditions are normal. 

If the Autoreset counter (not visible) contains more trips 

than the selected number of attempts, the Autoreset cycle 

will be interrupted. No Autoreset will then take place. 

If there are no trips for more than 10 minutes, the Autoreset 

counter decreases by one. 

If the maximum number of trips has been reached, the trip 

message hour counter is marked with an “A”. 

If the Autoreset is full then the VSD must be reset by a normal 

Reset. 


Example: 

• Autoreset = 5 

• Within 10 minutes 6 trips occur 

• At the 6th trip there is no Autoreset, because the Autoreset 

trip log contains 5 trips already. 

• To reset, apply a normal reset: set the reset input high to 

low and high again to maintain the Autoreset function. 

The counter is reset. 

Default: 

Range: 

0 (no Autoreset) 

0–10 attempts 





Modbus format 

Over temperature [252] 

Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the 

time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function 

is active. 


UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp 

time. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 




Modbus format 

251 No of Trips 

Stp 0 

A 

252 Overtemp 

StpA 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Off 

Overvolt D [253] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

Overvolt G [254] 

Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the 


is active. 


Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 


time. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

253 Overvolt D 

Stp A 

Off 

254 Overvolt G 

Stp A 

Off 




Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 


time. 


Overvolt [255] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Motor Lost [256] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

NOTE: Only visible when Motor Lost is selected. 


255 Overvolt 

Stp A 

Off 

256 Motor Lost 

Stp A 

Off 




Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Locked Rotor [257] 



is active. 

257 Locked Rotor 

Stp A 

Off 





Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Power Fault [258] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

Undervoltage [259] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 




Modbus format 

258 Power Fault 

Stp A 

Off 

259 Undervoltage 

Stp A 

Off 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


Motor I 2 t [25A] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

Motor I 2 t Trip Type [25B] 

Select the preferred way to react to a Motor I 2 t trip. 

Default: 

Trip 

Trip 0 The motor will trip 


Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Deceleration 1 The motor will decelerate 




Modbus format 

25A Motor I 2 t 

Stp A 

Off 

25B Motor I 2 t TT 

Stp A Trip 

UInt 

UInt 

PT100 [25C] 



is active. 

25C PT100 

Stp A 

Off 





Modbus format 

PT100 Trip Type [25D] 



is active. 

Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 

Same as menu [25B] 


PTC [25E] 



is active. 


Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

Uint 

UInt 




Modbus format 

25D PT100 TT 

Stp A Trip 

25E PTC 

Stp A 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Off 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


PTC Trip Type [25F] 

Select the preferred way to react to a PTC trip. 

Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 






Modbus format 

External Trip [25G] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


External Trip Type [25H] 



UInt 

UInt 




Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Default: 

Selection: 

25F PTC TT 

Stp A 

Trip 


Trip 

25G Ext Trip 

Stp A 

25H Ext Trip TT 

Stp A Trip 

Off 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Communication Error [25I] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

Communication Error Trip Type [25J] 

Select the preferred way to react to a communication trip. 

Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 



Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

Min Alarm [25K] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

25I Com Error 

StpA 

Off 

25J Com Error TT 

Stp A Trip 

25K Min Alarm 

Stp A 

Off 






Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Min Alarm Trip Type [25L] 

Select the preferred way to react to a min alarm trip. 

Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Max Alarm [25M] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

25L Min Alarm TT 

Stp A Trip 

25M Max Alarm 

StpA 

Off 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Max Alarm Trip Type [25N] 

Select the preferred way to react to a max alarm trip. 





Modbus format 

Over current F [25O] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


Pump [25P] 



is active. 


UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 




Modbus format 

25O Over curr F 

Stp A 

Off 

25P Pump 

Stp A 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Off 

25N Max Alarm TT 

Stp A Trip 

Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 



Over Speed [25Q] 



is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

External Motor Temperature [25R] 

Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. When 

the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function 

is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 




Modbus format 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

External Motor Trip Type [25S] 


Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 

25Q Over speed 

Stp A 

Off 

25R Ext Mot Temp 

Stp A 

Off 

25S Ext Mot TT 

Stp A Trip 






Modbus format 

Liquid cooling low level [25T] 

Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. When 

the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function 

is active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


Liquid Cooling Low level Trip Type [25U] 



UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 


Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 




Modbus format 

25T LC Level 

Stp A 

25U LC Level TT 

Stp A Trip 

UInt 

UInt 

Off 

11.2.8 Serial Communication [260] 

This function is to define the communication parameters for 

serial communication. There are two types of options available 

for serial communication, RS232/485 (Modbus/RTU) 

and fieldbus modules (Profibus, DeviceNet and Ethernet). 

For more information see chapter Serial communication and 

respective option manual. 


Comm Type [261] 

Select RS232/485 [262] or Fieldbus [263]. 

Default: 

RS232/485 0 

Fieldbus 1 

RS232/485 

RS232/485 selected 

RS232/485 [262] 

Press Enter to set up the parameters for RS232/485 (Modbus/RTU) 

communication. 

Baud rate [2621] 

Set the baud rate for the communication. 

Address [2622] 

Enter the unit address for the VSD. 

Fieldbus selected (Profibus, DeviceNet or 

Modbus/TCP) 

NOTE: Toggling the setting in this menu will perform a 

soft reset (re-boot) of the Fieldbus module. 

NOTE: This baud rate is only used for the isolated 

RS232/485 option. 

Default: 9600 

2400 0 

4800 1 

9600 2 

19200 3 

38400 4 

 

Selected baud rate 

NOTE: This address is only used for the isolated RS232/ 

485 option. 

Default: 1 

Selection: 1–247 

261 Com Type 

Stp A RS232/485 

262 RS232/485 

Stp 

2621 Baudrate 

Stp 9600 

A 

2622 Address 

Stp 1 

A 

Fieldbus [263] 

Press Enter to set up the parameters for fieldbus communication. 

Address [2631] 

Enter the unit address of the VSD. 

Default: 62 

Range: Profibus 0–126, DeviceNet 0–63 

Node address valid for Profibus and DeviceNet 

Process Data Mode [2632] 

Enter the mode of process data (cyclic data). For further 

information, see the Fieldbus option manual. 

Default: 

Basic 

None 0 Control/status information is not used. 

Basic 4 

Extended 8 

4 byte process data control/status information 

is used. 

4 byte process data (same as Basic setting) 

+ additional proprietary protocol for 

advanced users is used. 

Read/Write [2633] 

Select read/write to control the inverter over a fieldbus network. 

For further information, see the Fieldbus option manual. 

Default: 

RW 0 

Read 1 

263 Fieldbus 

Stp A 

2631 Address 

Stp A 

62 

2632 PrData Mode 

StpA 

Basic 

2633 Read/Write 

Stp A 

RW 

RW 

Valid for process data. Select R (read only) for logging process 

without writing process data. Select RW in normal cases 

to control inverter. 


Additional Process Values [2634] 

Define the number of additional process values sent in cyclic 

messages. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0-8 

Communication Fault [264] 

Main menu for communication fault/warning settings. For 

further details please see the Fieldbus option manual. 

Communication Fault Mode [2641]] 

Selects action if a communication fault is detected. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 No communication supervision. 

Trip 1 

Warning 2 


RS232/485 selected: 

The VSD will trip if there is no communication 

for time set in parameter [2642]. 

Fieldbus selected: 

The VSD will trip if: 

1. The internal communication between 

the control board and fieldbus option is 

lost for time set in parameter [2642]. 

2. If a serious network error has occurred. 

RS232/485 selected: 

The VSD will give a warning if there is no 

communication for time set in parameter 

[2642]. 

Fieldbus selected: 

The VSD will give a warning if: 

1. The internal communication between 

the control board and fieldbus option is 

lost for time set in parameter [2642]. 

2. If a serious network error has occurred. 

NOTE: Menu [214] and/or [215] must be set to COM to 

activate the communication fault function. 




Modbus format 

2634 AddPrValues 

Stp 0 

A 

2641 ComFlt Mode 

Stp A 

Off 

UInt 

UInt 

Communication Fault Time [2642]] 

Defines the delay time for the trip/warning. 

Default: 

Range: 

0.5 s 


Ethernet [265] 

Settings for Ethernet module (Modbus/TCP). For further 

information, see the Fieldbus option manual. 

IP Address [2651] 

MAC Address [2652] 

Subnet Mask [2653] 

Gateway [2654] 

0.1-15 s 




Modbus format 

Long, 1=0.1 s 

EInt 

NOTE: The Ethernet module must be re-booted to 

activate the below settings. For example by toggling 

parameter [261]. Non-initialized settings indicated by 

flashing display text. 

Default: 0.0.0.0 

Default: 


2642 ComFlt Time 

Stp 0.5s 

A 

2651 IP Address 

000.000.000.000 

2652 MAC Address 

Stp 000000000000 

A 

An unique number for the Ethernet module. 

2653 Subnet Mask 

0.000.000.000 

2654 Gateway 

0.000.000.000 



DHCP [2655] 

Default: 

Selection: 

Off 

On/Off 

Fieldbus Signals [266] 

Defines modbus mapping for additional process values. For 

further information, see the Fieldbus option manual. 

FB Signal 1 - 16 [2661]-[266G] 

Used to create a block of parameters which are read/written 

via communication. 1 to 8 read + 1 to 8 write parameters 

possible. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0-65535 

2655 DHCP 

Stp A 


Off 

2661 FB Signal 1 

Stp 0 

A 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42801-42816 

Profibus slot/index 167/215-167/230 


UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

FB Status [269] 

Sub menus showing status of fieldbus parameters. Please see 

the Fieldbus manual for detailed information. 

269 FB Status 

Stp 

11.3 Process and Application 

Parameters [300] 

These parameters are mainly adjusted to obtain optimum 

process or machine performance. 

The read-out, references and actual values depends on 

selected process source, [321}: 

Table 23 

Selected process 

source 

11.3.1 Set/View Reference Value 

[310] 

View reference value 

As default the menu [310] is in view operation. The value of 

the active reference signal is displayed. The value is displayed 

according to selected process source, [321] or the process 

unit selected in menu [322]. 

Set reference value 

If the function Reference Control [214] is set to: Ref Control 

= Keyboard, the reference value can be set in menu Set/ 

View Reference [310] as a normal parameter or as a motor 

potentiometer with the + and - keys on the control panel 

depending on the selection of Keyboard Reference Mode in 

menu [369]. The ramp times used for setting the reference 

value with the Normal function selected in menu [369] are 

according to the set Acc Time [331] and Dec Time [332]. 

The ramp times used for setting the reference value with the 

MotPot function selected in [369] are according to the set 

Acc MotPot [333] and Dec MotPot [334]. Menu [310] displays 

on-line the actual reference value according to the 

Mode Settings in Table 23. 


Unit for reference and 

actual value 

Speed rpm 4 digits 

Torque % 3 digits 

PT100 °C 3 digits 

Frequency Hz 3 digits 

Default: 

0 rpm 

Resolution 

Dependent on: 

Process Source [321] and Process Unit 

[322] 

Speed mode 0 - max speed [343] 

Torque mode 0 - max torque [351] 

Other modes 

Min according to menu [324] - max according 

to menu [325] 




Modbus format 

310 Set/View ref 

Stp 

0rpm 

Long 

EInt 


NOTE: The actual value in menu [310] is not copied, or 

loaded from the control panel memory when Copy Set 

[242], Copy to CP [244] or Load from CP [245] is 

performed. 

NOTE: If the MotPot function is used, the reference value 

ramp times are according to the Acc MotPot [333] and 

Dec MotPot [334] settings. Actual speed ramp will be 

limited according to Acc Time [331] and Dec Time [332]. 

11.3.2 Process Settings [320] 

With these functions, the VSD can be set up to fit the application. 

The menus [110], [120], [310], [362]-[368] and 

[711] use the process unit selected in [321] and [322] for the 

application, e.g. rpm, bar or m3/h. This makes it possible to 

easily set up the VSD for the required process requirements, 

as well as for copying the range of a feedback sensor to set up 

the Process Value Minimum and Maximum in order to 

establish accurate actual process information. 

Process Source [321] 

Select the signal source for the process value that controls 

the motor. The Process Source can be set to act as a function 

of the process signal on AnIn F(AnIn), a function of the 

motor speed F(Speed), a function of the shaft torque 

F(Torque) or as a function of a process value from serial 

communication F(Bus). The right function to select 

depends on the characteristics and behaviour of the process. 

If the selection Speed, Torque or Frequency is set, the VSD 

will use speed, torque or frequency as reference value. 

Example 

An axial fan is speed-controlled and there is no feedback signal 

available. The process needs to be controlled within fixed 

process values in “m 3 /hr” and a process read-out of the air 

flow is needed. The characteristic of this fan is that the air 

flow is linearly related to the actual speed. So by selecting 

F(Speed) as the Process Source, the process can easily be 

controlled. 

The selection F(xx) indicates that a process unit and scaling 

is needed, set in menus [322]-[328]. This makes it possible 

to e.g. use pressure sensors to measure flow etc. If F(AnIn) is 

selected, the source is automatically connected to the AnIn 

which has Process Value as selected. 

Default: 


F(AnIn) 0 

Function of analogue input. E.g. via PID 

control, [330]. 

Speed 1 Speed as process reference 1 . 

PT100 3 Temperature as process reference. 

F(Speed) 4 Function of speed 

F(Bus) 6 Function of communication reference 

Frequency 7 Frequency as process reference 1 . 

1 . Only when Drive mode [213] is set to Speed or V/Hz. 

NOTE: When PT100 is selected, use PT100 channel 1 on 

the PTC/PT100 option board. 

NOTE: If Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu 

[321] Proc Source, menus [322] - [328] are hidden. 

NOTE: The motor control method depends on the 

selection of drive mode [213], regardless of selected 

process source, [321]. 


321 Proc Source 

StpA 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 


Process Unit [322] 

Default: rpm 

Off 0 No unit selection 

% 1 Percent 

°C 2 Degrees Centigrade 

°F 3 Degrees Fahrenheit 

bar 4 bar 

Pa 5 Pascal 

Nm 6 Torque 

Hz 7 Frequency 

rpm 8 Revolutions per minute 

m 3 /h 9 Cubic meters per hour 

gal/h 10 Gallons per hour 

ft 3 /h 11 Cubic feet per hour 

User 12 User defined unit 





Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

User-defined Unit [323] 

This menu is only displayed if User is selected in menu 

[322]. The function enables the user to define a unit with six 

symbols. Use the Prev and Next key to move the cursor to 

required position. Then use the + and - keys to scroll down 

the character list. Confirm the character by moving the cursor 

to the next position by pressing the Next key. 

Character 

322 Proc Unit 

Stp A 

rpm 

No. for serial 

comm. 

Character 

Space 0 m 58 

0–9 1–10 n 59 

A 11 ñ 60 

B 12 o 61 

C 13 ó 62 

D 14 ô 63 

E 15 p 64 

F 16 q 65 

G 17 r 66 

H 18 s 67 

I 19 t 68 

J 20 u 69 


comm. 

Character 


comm. 

Character 

K 21 ü 70 

L 22 v 71 

M 23 w 72 

N 24 x 73 

O 25 y 74 

P 26 z 75 

Q 27 å 76 

R 28 ä 77 

S 29 ö 78 

T 30 ! 79 

U 31 ¨ 80 

Ü 32 # 81 

V 33 $ 82 

W 34 % 83 

X 35 & 84 

Y 36 · 85 

Z 37 ( 86 

Å 38 ) 87 

Ä 39 * 88 

Ö 40 + 89 

a 41 , 90 

á 42 - 91 

b 43 . 92 

c 44 / 93 

d 45 : 94 

e 46 ; 95 

é 47 < 96 

ê 48 = 97 

ë 49 > 98 

f 50 ? 99 

g 51 @ 100 

h 52 ^ 101 

i 53 _ 102 

í 54 ° 103 

j 55 

2 

104 

k 56 

3 

105 

l 57 


comm. 


Example: 

Create a user unit named kPa. 

1. When in the menu [323] press Next to move the cursor 

to the right most position. 

2. Press the + key until the character k is displayed. 

3. Press Next. 

4. Then press the + key until P is displayed and confirm 

with Next. 

5. Repeat until you have entered kPa. 

Default: 

No characters shown 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 

Profibus slot/index 


Modbus format 

323 User Unit 

Stp A 

43304 

43305 

43306 

43307 

43308 

43309 

169/208 

169/209 

169/210 

169/211 

169/212 

169/213 

UInt 

UInt 

When sending a unit name you send one character at a time 

starting at the right most position. 

Process Min [324] 

This function sets the minimum process value allowed. 

324 Process Min 

Stp 0 

A 

Process Max [325] 

This menu is not visible when speed, torque or frequency is 

selected. The function sets the value of the maximum process 

value allowed. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0.000-10000 





Modbus format 

EInt 

Ratio [326] 

This menu is not visible when speed, frequency or torque is 

selected. The function sets the ratio between the actual process 

value and the motor speed so that it has an accurate process 

value when no feedback signal is used. See Fig. 73. 

Default: Linear 

Linear 0 Process is linear related to speed/torque 

Quadratic 1 


325 Process Max 

Stp 0 

A 

326 Ratio 

Stp A 

Linear 

Process is quadratic related to speed/ 

torque 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Default: 0 

Range: 


0.000-10000 (Speed, Torque, F(Speed), 

F(Torque)) 

-10000– +10000 (F(AnIn, PT100, F(Bus)) 




Modbus format 

EInt 


Process 

unit 

Process 

Max 

[325] 

F(Value), Process Max [328] 

This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It offers 

you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by scaling 

the process values. The process values are scaled by linking 

them to known data in the VSD. With F(Value), Proc 

Max the precise value at which the entered Process Max 

[525] is valid can be entered. 

Ratio=Linear 


[321] Proc Source, menus [322]- [328] are hidden. 

Process 

Min 

[324] Min 


[341] 

Fig. 73 Ratio 

F(Value), Process Min [327] 

This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It offers 

you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by scaling 

the process values. The process values are scaled by linking 

them to known data in the VSD. With F(Value), Proc 

Min [327] the precise value at which the entered Process 

Min [324] is valid can be entered. 


[321] Proc Source, menus [322]- [328] are hidden. 

Default: 

Min -1 

Min 


Ratio=Quadratic 


Max 


[343] 

327 F(Val) PrMin 

StpA 

Min 

According to Min Speed setting in 

[341]. 

According to Max Speed setting in 

Max -2 

[343]. 

0.000-10000 0-10000 0.000-10000 




Long, 1=1 rpm 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Default: 

Max 

Min -1 Min 

Max -2 Max 

0.000- 

10000 

0-10000 0.000-10000 





Modbus format 

328 F(Val) PrMax 

StpA 

Max 

Long, 1=1 rpm 

EInt 

Example 

A conveyor belt is used to transport bottles. The required 

bottle speed needs to be within 10 to 100 bottles/s. Process 

characteristics: 

10 bottles/s = 150 rpm 

100 bottles/s = 1500 rpm 

The amount of bottles is linearly related to the speed of the 

conveyor belt. 

Set-up: 

Process Min [324] = 10 

Process Max [325] = 100 

Ratio [326] = linear 

F(Value), ProcMin [327] = 150 

F(Value), ProcMax [328] = 1500 

With this set-up, the process data is scaled and linked to 

known values which results in an accurate control. 


F(Value) 

PrMax 1500 

[328] 

Nominal 


100% n MOT 

rpm 

Max Speed 80% n MOT 

Linear 

F(Value 

PrMin 

[327] 

150 

Bottles/s 

(06-F12) 

8s 

10s 

t 

10 

Process Min [324] 

100 

Process Max [325] 

Fig. 75 Acceleration time and maximum speed 

Fig. 74 

11.3.3 Start/Stop settings [330] 

Submenu with all the functions for acceleration, deceleration, 

starting, stopping, etc. 

Acceleration Time [331] 

The acceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the 

motor to accelerate from 0 rpm to nominal motor speed. 

NOTE: If the Acc Time is too short, the motor is 

accelerated according to the Torque Limit. The actual 

Acceleration Time may then be longer than the value 

set. 

Default: 

Range: 

10.0 s 

0.50–3600 s 





Modbus format 

331 Acc Time 

Stp 10.0s 

A 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

Fig. 75 shows the relationship between nominal motor 

speed/max speed and the acceleration time. The same is 

valid for the deceleration time. 

Fig. 76 shows the settings of the acceleration and deceleration 

times with respect to the nominal motor speed. 

rpm 

(NG_06-F11) 

Fig. 76 Acceleration and deceleration times 

Deceleration Time [332] 

The deceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the 

motor to decelerate from nominal motor speed to 0 rpm. 

Default: 

Range: 

Nom. Speed 

10.0 s 

0.50–3600 s 





Modbus format 

Acc Time [331] Dec Time [332] 

332 Dec Time 

Stp 10.0s 

A 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

NOTE: If the Dec Time is too short and the generator 

energy cannot be dissipated in a brake resistor, the 

motor is decelerated according to the overvoltage limit. 

The actual deceleration time may be longer than the 

value set. 


Acceleration Time Motor Potentiometer 

[333] 

It is possible to control the speed of the VSD using the 

motor potentiometer function. This function controls the 

speed with separate up and down commands, over remote 

signals. The MotPot function has separate ramps settings 

which can be set in Acc MotPot [333] and Dec MotPot 

[334]. 

If the MotPot function is selected, this is the acceleration 

time for the MotPot up command. The acceleration time is 

defined as the time it takes for the motor potentiometer 

value to increase from 0 rpm to nominal speed. 

Default: 

Range: 

16.0 s 

0.50–3600 s 





Modbus format 

Deceleration Time Motor Potentiometer 

[334] 

If the MotPot function is selected, this is the deceleration 

time for the MotPot down command. The deceleration time 

is defined as the time it takes for the motor potentiometer 

value to decrease from nominal speed to 0 rpm. 

Default: 

Range: 

16.0 s 

0.50–3600 s 


Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 




Modbus format 

333 Acc MotPot 

Stp 16.0s 

A 

334 Dec MotPot 

Stp 16.0s 

A 

EInt 

Acceleration Time to Minimum Speed 

[335] 

If minimum speed, [341]>0 rpm, is used in an application, 

the VSD uses separate ramp times below this level. With 

Acc>MinSpeed [335] and DecMin Spd 

Stp 10.0s 

A 

EInt 

[331] [332] 

[336] 

time 

Deceleration Time from Minimum 

Speed [336] 

If a minimum speed is programmed, this parameter will be 

used to set the deceleration time from the minimum speed 

to 0 rpm at a stop command. The ramp time is defined as 

the time it takes for the motor to decelerate from the nominal 

motor speed to 0 rpm. 


336 Dec

Start Mode [339] 

Sets the way of starting the motor when a run command is 

given. 

Default: 

Fast 0 

Fast (fixed) 


339 Start Mode 

Stp A Fast 

The motor flux increases gradually. The 

motor shaft starts rotating immediately 

once the Run command is given. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

sets the way of stopping the motor when a Stop command is 

given. 

Default: 

Decel 0 

Decel 


The motor decelerates to 0 rpm according 

to the set deceleration time. 

Coast 1 The motor freewheels naturally to 0 rpm. 




Modbus format 

33B Stop Mode 

StpA 

Decel 

UInt 

UInt 

Spinstart [33A] 

The spinstart will smoothly start a motor which is already 

rotating by catching the motor at the actual speed and control 

it to the desired speed. If in an application, such as an 

exhausting fan, the motor shaft is already rotating due to 

external conditions, a smooth start of the application is 

required to prevent excessive wear. With the spinstart=on, 

the actual control of the motor is delayed due to detecting 

the actual speed and rotation direction, which depend on 

motor size, running conditions of the motor before the 

Spinstart, inertia of the application, etc. Depending on the 

motor electrical time constant and the size of the motor, it 

can take maximum a couple of minutes before the motor is 

caught. 

Default: 

Off 0 

On 1 

Off 


33A Spinstart 

Stp A 

Off 

No spinstart. If the motor is already running 

the VSD can trip or will start with high current. 

Spinstart will allow the start of a running 

motor without tripping or high inrush currents. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

11.3.4 Mechanical brake control 

The four brake-related menus [33C] to [33F] can be used to 

control mechanical brakes. 

Brake Release Time [33C] 

The Brake Release Time sets the time the VSD delays before 

ramping up to whatever final reference value is selected. 

During this time a predefined speed can be generated to 

hold the load where after the mechanical brake finally 

releases. This speed can be selected at Release Speed, [33D]. 

Immediate after the brake release time expiration the brake 

lift signal is set. The user can set a digital output or relay to 

the function Brake. This output or relay can control the 

mechanical brake. 

Default: 

Range: 

0.00 s 

0.00–3.00 s 





Modbus format 

33C Brk Release 

Stp 0.00s 

A 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

Stop Mode [33B] 

When the VSD is stopped, different methods to come to a 

standstill can be selected in order to optimize the stop and 

prevent unnecessary wear, like water hammer. Stop Mode 


Fig. 80 shows the relation between the four Brake functions. 

• Brake Release Time [33C] 

• Start Speed [33D] 

• Brake Engage Time [33E] 

• Brake Wait Time [33F] 

The correct time setting depends on the maximum load and 

the properties of the mechanical brake. During the brake 

release time it is possible to apply extra holding torque by 

setting a start speed reference with the function start speed 

[33D]. 

n 

Brake release 

time [33C] 

Brake wait 

time [33F] 

Brake engage 

time [33E] 

Start 

Release Speed [33D] 

t 

Mechanical 

Brake 

Open 

Closed 

Brake Relay 

Output 

On 

Off 

Fig. 80 Brake Output functions 

Action must take place within 

these time intervals 

G06 16 

NOTE: This function is designed to operate a mechanical 

brake via the digital outputs or relays (set to brake 

function) controlling a mechanical brake. 


Release Speed [33D] 

The release speed only operates with the brake function: 

brake release [33C]. The release speed is the initial speed reference 

during the brake release time. 

Default: 

Range: 

Depend on: 


Brake Engage Time [33E] 

The brake engage time is the time the load is held to engage 

a mechanical brake. 


0 rpm 

- 4x Sync. Speed to 4x Sync. 

4xmotor sync speed, 1500 rpm for 1470 

rpm motor. 




Int, 1=1 rpm 

Modbus format 

Int, 1=1 rpm 

Default: 

Range: 

33D Release Spd 

StpA 

0rpm 

33E Brk Engage 

Stp 0.00s 

A 

0.00 s 

0.00–3.00 s 




Long, 1=0.01 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Wait Before Brake Time [33F] 

The brake wait time is the time to keep brake open and to 

hold the load, either in order to be able to speed up immediately, 

or to stop and engage the brake. 

33F Brk Wait 

Stp 0.00s 

A 





Modbus format 

Vector Brake [33G] 

Braking by increasing the internal electrical losses in the 

motor. 

Default: 

Off 0 

On 1 

Off 


Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

Vector brake switched off. VSD brakes normal 

with voltage limit on the DC link. 

Maximum VSD current (I CL ) is available for 

braking. 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

11.3.5 Speed [340] 

Menu with all parameters for settings regarding to speeds, 

such as Min/Max speeds, Jog speeds, Skip speeds. 

Minimum Speed [341] 

Sets the minimum speed. The minimum speed will operate 

as an absolute lower limit. Used to ensure the motor does 

not run below a certain speed and to maintain a certain performance. 

Default: 

Range: 

33G Vector Brake 

Stp A 

Off 

341 Min Speed 

Stp A 0rpm 

0 rpm 

0 - Max Speed 

Dependent on: Set/View ref [310] 

Default: 

Range: 

0.00 s 

0.00–30.0 s 

NOTE: A lower speed value than the set minimum speed 

can be shown in the display due to motor slip. 






Modbus format 

Stop/Sleep when less than Minimum 


With this function it is possible to put the VSD in “sleep 

mode” when it is running at minimum speed for the length 

of time set, due to process value feedback or a reference 

value that corresponds to a speed lower than the min speed 

set. The VSD will go into sleep mode after programmed 

time. When the reference signal or process value feedback 

raises the required speed value above the min speed value, 

the VSD will automatically wake up and ramp up to the 

required speed. 


Int, 1=1 rpm 

Int, 1=1 rpm 

NOTE: Menu [386] has higher priority than menu [342]. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 




Modbus format 

342 Stp

n 

Skip Speed 2 High [347] 

The same function as menu [345] for the 2nd skip range. 

Skip Speed HI 

Skip Speed LO 

Default: 

Range: 

347 SkipSpd 2 Hi 

StpA 

0rpm 

0 rpm 

0 – 4 x Motor Sync Speed 


Fig. 82 Skip Speed 

NOTE: The two Skip Speed ranges may be overlapped. 

Skip Speed 1 High [345] 

Skipspd1 HI sets the higher value for the 1st skip range. 

Default: 

Range: 

0 rpm 

0 – 4 x Sync Speed 





Int 

Modbus format 

Int 

Skip Speed 2 Low [346] 

The same function as menu [344] for the 2nd skip range. 

Default: 

Range: 

(NG_06-F17) 

Speed Reference 

345 SkipSpd 1 Hi 

Stp A 0rpm 

346 SkipSpd 2 Lo 

StpA 

0rpm 

0 rpm 

0 – 4 x Motor Sync Speed 




Int, 1=1 rpm 

Modbus format 

Int, 1=1 rpm 

Jog Speed [348] 

The Jog Speed function is activated by one of the digital 

inputs. The digital input must be set to the Jog function 

[520]. The Jog command/function will automatically generate 

a run command as long as the Jog command/function is 

active. The rotation is determined by the polarity of the set 

Jog Speed. 

Example 

If Jog Speed = -10, this will give a Run Left command at 

10 rpm regardless of RunL or RunR commands. Fig. 83 

shows the function of the Jog command/function. 

Default: 

Range: 

Dependent on: 

50 rpm 


-4 x motor sync speed to +4 x motor sync 

speed 

Defined motor sync speed. Max = 400%, normally 

max=VSD I max /motor I nom x 100%. 




Modbus format 

348 Jog Speed 

StpA 

50rpm 

Int 

Int 





Int, 1=1 rpm 

Modbus format 

Int, 1=1 rpm 


Jog 

Freq 

Jog 

command 

f 

Fig. 83 Jog command 

11.3.6 Torques [350] 

Menu with all parameters for torque settings. 

t 

t 

(NG_06-F18) 

frequencies and is used to obtain a higher starting torque. 

The maximum voltage increase is 25% of the nominal output 

voltage. See Fig. 84. 

Selecting “Automatic” will use the optimal value according 

to the internal model of motor. “User-Defined” can be 

selected when the start conditions of the application do not 

change and a high starting torque is always required. A fixed 

IxR Compensation value can be set in the menu [353]. 

Default: 

352 IxR Comp 

Stp A 

Off 

Off 0 Function disabled 

Automatic 1 Automatic compensation 

Off 

User Defined 2 User defined value in percent. 

Maximum Torque [351] 

Sets the maximum torque. This Maximum Torque operates 

as an upper torque limit. A Speed Reference is always necessary 

to run the motor. 

T MOT 

( Nm) 

P MOT 

( w)x60 

= ---------------------------------------- 

n MOT 

( rpm)x2Π 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Default: 

Range: 0–400% 

351 Max Torque 

Stp 120% 

A 

120% calculated from the motor data 

% 

100 

U 

IxR Comp=25% 





Modbus format 

EInt 

NOTE: 100% Torque means: I NOM = I MOT . The maximum 

depends on the motor current and VSD max current 

settings, but the absolute maximum adjustment is 

400%. 

NOTE: The power loss in the motor will increase by the 

square of the torque when operating above 100%. 400% 

torque will result in 1600% power loss, which will 

increase the motor temperature very quickly. 

IxR Compensation [352] 

This function compensates for the drop in voltage over different 

resistances such as (very) long motor cables, chokes 

and motor stator by increasing the output voltage at a constant 

frequency. IxR Compensation is most important at low 

Fig. 84 IxR Comp at Linear V/Hz curve 

IxR Comp_user [353] 

Only visible if User-Defined is selected in previous menu. 

Default: 0.0% 

Range: 

25 

IxR Com=0% 

f 

10 20 30 40 50 Hz 

353 IxR CompUsr 

Stp 0.0% 

A 

0-25% x U NOM (0.1% of resolution) 






Modbus format 

Long 

EInt 

NOTE: A too high level of IxR Compensation could cause 

motor saturation. This can cause a “Power Fault” trip. 

The effect of IxR Compensation is stronger with higher 

power motors. 

NOTE: The motor may be overheated at low speed. 

Therefore it is important that the Motor I 2 t Current [232] 

is set correctly. 

NOTE: Flux optimization works best at stable situations 

in slow changing processes. 

11.3.7 Preset References [360] 

Motor Potentiometer [361] 

Sets the properties of the motor potentiometer function. See 

the parameter DigIn1 [521] for the selection of the motor 

potentiometer function. 

361 Motor Pot 

StpA 

Non Volatie 

Flux Optimization [354] 

Flux Optimization reduces the energy consumption and the 

motor noise, at low or no load conditions. 

Flux Optimization automatically decreases the V/Hz ratio, 

depending on the actual load of the motor when the process 

is in a steady situation. Fig. 85 shows the area within which 

the Flux Optimization is active. 

Default: 

Volatile 0 

Non volatile 1 

Non Volatile 

After a stop, trip or power down, the VSD 

will start always from zero speed (or minimum 

speed, if selected). 

Non Volatile. After a stop, trip or power 

down of the VSD, the reference value at 

the moment of the stop will be memorized. 

After a new start command the output 

speed will resume to this saved value. 

354 Flux optim 

Stp A 

Off 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Function disabled 

On 1 Function enabled 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

n 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

t 

% 

100 

U 

Motpot 

UP 

t 

Flux optimizing 

area 

f 

50 Hz 

Motpot 

DOWN 

Fig. 86 MotPot function 

t 

Fig. 85 Flux Optimizing 


Preset Ref 1 [362] to Preset Ref 7 

[368] 

Preset speeds have priority over the analogue inputs. Preset 

speeds are activated by the digital inputs. The digital inputs 

must be set to the function Pres. Ref 1, Pres. Ref 2 or Pres. 

Ref 4. 

Depending on the number of digital inputs used, up to 7 

preset speeds can be activated per parameter set. Using all 

the parameter sets, up to 28 preset speeds are possible. 

Default: Speed, 0 rpm 

Dependent on: Process Source [321] and Process Unit [322] 

Speed mode 0 - max speed [343] 

Torque mode 0 - max torque [351] 

Other modes 


Min according to menu [324] - max according 

to menu [325] 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43132–43138 

Profibus slot/index 169/36–169/42 


Long 

Modbus format 

EInt 

The same settings are valid for the menus: 

[363] Preset Ref 2, with default 250 rpm 






The selection of the presets is as in Table 24. 

Table 24 

Preset 

Ctrl3 

Preset 

Ctrl2 

362 Preset Ref 1 

Stp A 0rpm 

Preset 

Ctrl1 

Output Speed 

0 0 0 Analogue reference 

0 0 1 1) Preset Ref 1 

0 1 1) 0 Preset Ref 2 

0 1 1 Preset Ref 3 

1 1) 0 0 Preset Ref 4 




1) = selected if only one preset reference is active 

1 = active input 

0 = non active input 

NOTE: If only Preset Ctrl3 is active, then the Preset Ref 4 

can be selected. If Presets Ctrl2 and 3 are active, then 

the Preset Ref 2, 4 and 6 can be selected. 

Keyboard reference mode [369] 

This parameter sets how the reference value [310] is edited. 

Default: 

Normal 0 

MotPot 1 

Normal 


The reference value is edited as a normal 

parameter (the new reference value is 

activated when Enter is pressed after the 

value has been changed). The Acc Time 

[331] and Dec Time [332] are used. 

The reference value is edited using the 

motor potentiometer function (the new 

reference value is activated directly when 

the key + or - is pressed). The Acc MotPot 

[333] and Dec MotPot [334] are used. 




Modbus format 

369 Key Ref Mode 

StpA 

Normal 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: When Key Ref Mode is set to MotPot, the 

reference value ramp times are according to the Acc 

MotPot [333] and Dec MotPot [334] settings. Actual 

speed ramp will be limited according to Acc Time [331] 

and Dec Time [332]. 

11.3.8 PID Process Control [380] 

The PID controller is used to control an external process via 

a feedback signal. The reference value can be set via analogue 

input AnIn1, at the Control Panel [310] by using a Preset 

Reference, or via serial communication. The feedback signal 

(actual value) must be connected to an analogue input that 

is set to the function Process Value. 


+ 

Process PID Control [381] 

This function enables the PID controller and defines the 

response to a changed feedback signal. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 PID control deactivated. 

On 1 

Invert 2 


PID P Gain [383] 

Setting the P gain for the PID controller. 


The speed increases when the feedback 

value decreases. PID settings according to 

menus [381] to [385]. 

The speed decreases when the feedback 

value decreases. PID settings according to 

menus [383] to [385]. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Default: 1.0 

Range: 0.0–30.0 

381 PID Control 

Stp A 

Off 

383 PID P Gain 

Stp 1.0 

A 




Modbus format 

EInt 

Process 

reference 

Process 

feedback 

- 

Process 

PID 

VSD 

M 

PID I Time [384] 

Setting the integration time for the PID controller. 

Default: 

Range: 

1.00 s 

0.01–300 s 





Long, 1=0.01 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Process PID D Time [385] 

Setting the differentiation time for the PID controller. 

Default: 

Range: 

0.00 s 

0.00–30 s 





Modbus format 

384 PID I Time 

Stp 1.00s 

A 

385 PID D Time 

Stp 0.00s 

A 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

PID sleep functionality 

This function is controlled via a wait delay and a separate 

wake-up margin condition. With this function it is possible 

to put the VSD in “sleep mode” when the process value is at 

it’s set point and the motor is running at minimum speed for 

the length of the time set in [386]. By going into sleep 

mode, the by the application consumed energy is reduced to 

a minimum. When the process feedback value goes below 

the set margin on the process reference as set in [387], the 

VSD will wake up automatically and normal PID operation 

continues, see examples. 

Process 

06-F95 

Fig. 87 Closed loop PID control 


PID sleep when less than minimum 

speed [386] 

If the PID output is equal to or less than minimum speed 

for given delay time, the VSD will go to sleep. 

Default: 

Range: 

Off 

Off, 0.01 –3600 s 





Modbus format 

PID Activation Margin [387] 

The PID activation (wake-up) margin is related to the process 

reference and sets the limit when the VSD should wakeup/start 

again. 


Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

NOTE: Menu [386] has higher priority than menu [342]. 

Default: 0 

Range: 

0 –10000 in Process unit 




Modbus format 

386 PID

PID Steady state test delay. 

NOTE: It is important that the system has reached a 

stable situation before the Steady State Test is initiated. 

Default: 

Range: 

Off 

Off, 0.01–3600 s 





Modbus format 

388 PID Stdy Tst 

StpA 

Off 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

PID Steady State Margin [389] 

PID steady state margin defines a margin band around the 

reference that defines “steady state operation”. During the 

steady state test the PID operation is overruled and the VSD 

is decreasing the speed as long as the PID error is within the 

steady state margin. If the PID error goes outside the steady 

state margin the test failed and normal PID operation continues, 

see example. 

Default: 0 

Range: 

0–10000 in process unit 





Modbus format 

389 PID Stdy Mar 

Stp 0 

A 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

Example: The PID Steady Test starts when the process value 

[711] is within the margin and Steady State Test Wait Delay 

has expired. The PID output will decrease speed with a step 

value which corresponds to the margin as long as the Process 

value [711] stays within steady state margin. When Min 

Speed [341] is reached the steady state test was successful 

and stop/sleep is commanded if PID sleep function 

[386]and [387] is activated. If the Process value [711] goes 

outside the set steady state margins then the test 

failed and normal PID operation will continue, see Fig. 90 

. 

[711] Process Value 

[310] Process Ref 

[389] 

[389] 

[387] 

[388] 

time 

[712] Speed 

Start steady 

state test 

Stop steady 

state test 

Normal PID 

Normal PID 

Steady state 

test 

Stop/Sleep 

[341] Min Speed [386] PID

11.3.9 Pump/Fan Control [390] 

The Pump Control functions are in menu [390]. The function 

is used to control a number of drives (pumps, fans, etc.) 

of which one is always driven by the VSD. 

Pump enable [391] 

This function will enable the pump control to set all relevant 

pump control functions. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Pump control is switched off. 

On 1 


Pump control is on: 

- Pump control parameters [392] to [39G] 

appear and are activated according to 


- View functions [39H] to [39M] are added 

in the menu structure. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Number of Drives [392] 

Sets the total number of drives which are used, including the 

Master VSD. The setting here depends on the parameter 

Select Drive [393]. After the number of drives is chosen it is 

important to set the relays for the pump control. If the digital 

inputs are also used for status feedback, these must be set 

for the pump control according to; Pump 1 OK– Pump6 

OK in menu [520]. 

Default: 1 

1-3 Number of drives if I/O Board is not used. 

1-6 

1-7 

391 Pump enable 

StpA 

Off 

392 No of Drives 

Stp A 

1 

Number of drives if 'Alternating MASTER' is 

used, see Select Drive [393]. (I/O Board is 

used.) 

Number of drives if 'Fixed MASTER' is used, 

see Select Drive [393]. 

(I/O Board is used.) 

NOTE: Used relays must be defined as Slave Pump or 

Master Pump. Used digital inputs must be defined as 

Pump Feedback. 





Modbus format 

Select Drive [393] 

Sets the main operation of the pump system. 'Sequence' and 

'Runtime' are Fixed MASTER operation. 'All' means Alternating 

MASTER operation. 

Default: 

Sequence 0 

Run Time 1 

All 2 

Sequence 


UInt 

UInt 

Fixed MASTER operation: 

- The additional drives will be selected in 

sequence, i.e. first pump 1 then pump 2 

etc. 

- A maximum of 7 drives can be used. 

Fixed MASTER operation: 

- The additional drives will be selected 

depending on the Run Time. So the drive 

with the lowest Run Time will be selected 

first. The Run Time is monitored in menus 

[39H] to [39M] in sequence. For each drive 

the Run Time can be reset. 

- When drives are stopped, the drive with 

the longest Run Time will be stopped first. 

- Maximum 7 drives can be used. 

Alternating MASTER operation: 

- When the drive is powered up, one drive is 

selected as the Master drive. The selection 

criteria depends on the Change Condition 

[394]. The drive will be selected according 

to the Run Time. So the drive with the lowest 

Run Time will be selected first. The Run 

Time is monitored in menus [39H] to [39M] 

in sequence. For each drive the Run Time 

can be reset. 

- A maximum of 6 drives can be used. 




Modbus format 

393 Select Drive 

StpA 

Sequence 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: This menu will NOT be active if less than 3 drives 

are selected. 


Change Condition [394] 

This parameter determines the criteria for changing the master. 

This menu only appears if Alternating MASTER operation 

is selected. The elapsed run time of each drive is 

monitored. The elapsed run time always determines which 

drive will be the 'new' master drive. 

This function is only active if the parameter Select Drive 

[393]=All. 

Default: 

Stop 0 

Timer 1 

Both 2 

Both 


The Runtime of the master drive determines 

when a master drive has to be 

changed. The change will only take place 

after a: 

- Power Up 

- Stop 

- Standby condition 

- Trip condition. 

The master drive will be changed if the 

timer setting in Change Timer [395] has 

elapsed. The change will take place immediately. 

So during operation the additional 

pumps will be stopped temporarily, the 

'new' master will be selected according to 

the Run Time and the additional pumps will 

be started again. 

It is possible to leave 2 pumps running during 

the change operation. This can be set 

with Drives on Change [396]. 

The master drive will be changed if the 

timer setting in Change Timer [395] has 

elapsed. The 'new' master will be selected 

according to the elapsed Run Time. The 

change will only take place after a: 

- Power Up 

- Stop 

- Standby condition. 

- Trip condition. 




Modbus format 

394 Change Cond 

Stp A Both 

UInt 

UInt 

Change Timer [395] 

When the time set here is elapsed, the master drive will be 

changed. This function is only active if Select Drive 

[393]=All and Change Cond [394]= Timer/ Both. 

Default: 

Range: 

50 h 

1-3000 h 





Modbus format 

Drives on Change [396] 

If a master drive is changed according to the timer function 

(Change Condition=Timer/Both [394]), it is possible to 

leave additional pumps running during the change operation. 

With this function the change operation will be as 

smooth as possible. The maximum number to be programmed 

in this menu depends on the number of additional 

drives. 

Example: 

If the number of drives is set to 6, the maximum value will 

be 4. This function is only active if Select Drive [393]=All. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0 to (the number of drives - 2) 


UInt, 1=1 h 

UInt, 1=1 h 




Modbus format 

395 Change Timer 

StpA 

50h 

396 Drives on Ch 

StpA 

0 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: If the Status feedback inputs (DigIn 9 to Digin 14) 

are used, the master drive will be changed immediately 

if the feedback generates an 'Error'. 


Upper Band [397] 

If the speed of the master drive comes into the upper band, 

an additional drive will be added after a delay time that is set 

in start delay [399]. 

Default: 10% 

Range: 


Example: 

Max Speed = 1500 rpm 

Min Speed = 300 rpm 

Upper Band = 10% 

Start delay will be activated: 

Range = Max Speed to Min Speed = 1500–300 = 1200 rpm 

10% of 1200 rpm = 120 rpm 

Start level = 1500–120 = 1380 rpm 

Fig. 91 Upper band 

0-100% of total min speed to max speed 




Modbus format 

EInt 


Max 

Min 

Lower Band [398] 

If the speed of the master drive comes into the lower band 

an additional drive will be stopped after a delay time. This 

delay time is set in the parameter Stop Delay [39A]. 

Default: 10% 

Range: 

397 Upper Band 

Stp 10% 

A 

Upper band 

Start Delay [399] 

398 Lower Band 

StpA 

10% 

next pump starts 

Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-12_1) 






Modbus format 

Example: 



Lower Band = 10% 

Stop delay will be activated: 

Range = Max Speed - Min Speed = 1500–300 = 1200 rpm 

10% of 1200 rpm = 120 rpm 

Start level = 300 + 120 = 420 rpm 


Max 

Min 

Fig. 92 Lower band 


This delay time must have elapsed before the next pump is 

started. A delay time prevents the nervous switching of 

pumps. 

Default: 

Range: 

0 s 

0-999 s 


EInt 



Fieldbus format Long, 1=1s 

Modbus format 

“top” pump stops 

Stop Delay [39A] 

Lower band 

399 Start Delay 

Stp A 

0s 

EInt 

Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-13_1) 



This delay time must have elapsed before the 'top' pump is 

stopped. A delay time prevents the nervous switching of 

pumps. 

Default: 

Range: 

39A Stop Delay 

Stp A 

0s 

0 s 

0-999 s 





Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Upper Band Limit [39B] 

If the speed of the pump reaches the upper band limit, the 

next pump is started immediately without delay. If a start 

delay is used this delay will be ignored. Range is between 

0%, equalling max speed, and the set percentage for the 

UpperBand [397]. 

39B Upp Band Lim 

Stp 0% 

A 

Lower Band Limit [39C] 

If the speed of the pump reaches the lower band limit, the 

'top' pump is stopped immediately without delay. If a stop 

delay is used this delay will be ignored. Range is from 0%, 

equalling min speed, to the set percentage for the Lower 

Band [398]. 

Default: 0% 

Range: 

0 to Lower Band level. 0% (=min speed) means 

that he Limit function is switched off. 





Modbus format 


Max 

39C Low Band Lim 

StpA 

0% 

“top” pump stops 

immediately 

EInt 

Default: 0% 

Range: 

0 to Upper Band level. 0% (=max speed) means 

that the Limit function is switched off. 


Min 

Lower band 


Lower band 

limit [39C] 

Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-15_2) 




Modbus format 


Max 

Upper band 

EInt 

next pump starts 

immediately 

Upper band 

limit [39B] 

Fig. 94 Lower band limit 

Settle Time Start [39D] 

The settle start allows the process to settle after a pump is 

switched on before the pump control continues. If an additional 

pump is started D.O.L. (Direct On Line) or Y/ Δ, the 

flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the 'rough' start/ 

stop method. This could cause unnecessary starting and 

stopping of additional pumps. 

During the Settle start: 

• PID controller is off. 

• The speed is kept at a fixed level after adding a pump. 

Min 

Fig. 93 Upper band limit 


Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-14_2) 

Default: 

Range: 

39D Settle Start 

StpA 

0s 

0 s 

0-999 s 






Modbus format 

Transition Speed Start [39E] 

The transition speed start is used to minimize a flow/pressure 

overshoot when adding another pump. When an additional 

pump needs to be switched on, the master pump will 

slow down to the set transition speed start value, before the 

additional pump is started. The setting depends on the 

dynamics of both the master drive and the additional drives. 

The transition speed is best set by trial and error. 

In general: 

• If the additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics, 

then a higher transition speed should be used. 

• If the additional pump has 'fast' start/stop dynamics, 

then a lower transition speed should be used. 

Default: 60% 

Range: 


Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 





Modbus format 

39E TransS Start 

Stp 60% 

A 

EInt 

Example 



TransS Start = 60% 

When an additional pump is needed, the speed will be controlled 

down to min speed + (60% x (1500 rpm - 200 rpm)) 

= 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. When this speed is 

reached, the additional pump with the lowest run time 

hours will be switched on. 


Actual 

Trans 

Min 

Fig. 95 Transition speed start 

Flow/Pressure 

Fig. 96 Effect of transition speed 

Settle Time Stop [39F] 

The settle stop allows the process to settle after a pump is 

switched off before the pump control continues. If an additional 

pump is stopped D.O.L. (Direct On Line) or Y/ Δ, 

the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the 'rough' 

start/stop method. This could cause unnecessary starting 

and stopping of additional pumps. 

During the Settle stop: 

• PID controller is off. 

• the speed is kept at a fixed level after stopping a pump 

Default: 

Range: 

0 s 

Switch on 

procedure starts 

0–999 s 


Additional pump 

Master pump 

Actual start 

command of next 

pump (RELAY) 

Transition speed 

decreases overshoot 

39F Settle Stop 

StpA 

0s 

Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-16_1) 

Time 




Modbus format 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 


Transition Speed Stop [39G] 

The transition speed stop is used to minimize a flow/pressure 

overshoot when shutting down an additional pump. 

The setting depends on the dynamics of both the master 

drive and the additional drives. 

In general: 

• If the additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics, 

then a higher transition speed should be used. 

• If the additional pump has 'fast' start/stop dynamics, 

then a lower transition speed should be used. 

Default: 60% 

Range: 






Modbus format 

39G TransS Stop 

Stp 60% 

A 

EInt 

Example 



TransS Start = 60% 

When less additional pumps are needed, the speed will be 

controlled up to min speed + (60% x (1500 rpm - 200 

rpm)) = 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. When this speed is 

reached, the additional pump with the highest run time 

hours will be switched off. 


Max 

Actual shut down of pump 

Master pump 

Run Times 1-6 [39H] to [39M] 

Unit: 

Range: 

h:m (hours:minutes) 

0h:0m–65535h:59m. 


Modbus Instance no/ 

DeviceNet no: 



Modbus format 

Reset Run Times 1-6 [39H1] to [39M1] 

Default: 

No 0 

Yes 1 

No 


31051 hours, 31052 minutes, 





31066 hours, 31067 minutes 

121/195, 121/198, 121/201, 

121/204, 121/207, 121/210 

UInt 

UInt 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 38–43, pump 1 -6 



Modbus format 

39H Run Time 1 

StpA 

h:mm 

39H1 Rst Run Tm1 

StpA 

No 

UInt 

UInt 

Trans 

Actual 

Min 

Additional pump 

Flow/Pressure 

Switch off procedure starts 

Fig. 97 Transition speed stop 

Pump Status [39N] 

39N Pump 123456 

StpA 

OCD 

Indication 

C 

D 

O 

E 

Description 

Control, master pump, only when alternating 

master is used 

Direct control 

Pump is off 

Pump error 


11.4 Load Monitor and Process 

Protection [400] 

11.4.1 Load Monitor [410] 

The monitor functions enable the VSD to be used as a load 

monitor. Load monitors are used to protect machines and 

processes against mechanical overload and underload, e.g. a 

conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming, belt failure on a 

fan and a pump dry running. See explanation in section 7.5, 

page 38. 

Alarm Select [411] 

Selects the types of alarms that are active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 No alarm functions active. 

Min 1 

Max 2 

Max+Min 3 


Alarm Trip [412] 

Selects which alarm must cause a trip to the VSD. 


Min Alarm active. The alarm output functions 

as an underload alarm. 

Max Alarm active. The alarm output functions 

as an overload alarm. 

Both Max and Min alarm are active. The 

alarm outputs function as overload and 

underload alarms. 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Off 

Selection: Same as in menu [411] 

UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

411 Alarm Select 

Stp A 

Off 

412 Alarm trip 

Stp A 

Off 

UInt 

UInt 

Ramp Alarm [413] 

This function inhibits the (pre) alarm signals during acceleration/deceleration 

of the motor to avoid false alarms. 

Default: 

Off 0 

On 1 

Off 


Alarm Start Delay [414] 

This parameter is used if, for example, you want to override 

an alarm during the start-up procedure. 

Sets the delay time after a run command, after which the 

alarm may be given. 

• If Ramp Alarm=On. The start delay begins after a RUN 

command. 

• If Ramp Alarm=Off. The start delay begins after the 

acceleration ramp. 


(Pre) alarms are inhibited during acceleration/deceleration. 

(Pre) alarms active during acceleration/ 

deceleration. 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Range: 

2 s 

0-3600 s 

UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

413 Ramp Alarm 

Stp A 

Off 

414 Start Delay 

Stp A 

2s 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Load Type [415] 

In this menu you select monitor type according to the load 

characteristic of your application. By selecting the required 

monitor type, the overload and underload alarm function 

can be optimized according to the load characteristic. 

When the application has a constant load over the whole 

speed range, i.e. extruder or screw compressor, the load type 


can be set to basic. This type uses a single value as a reference 

for the nominal load. This value is used for the complete 

speed range of the VSD. The value can be set or automatically 

measured. See Autoset Alarm [41A] and Normal Load 

[41B] about setting the nominal load reference. 

The load curve mode uses an interpolated curve with 9 load 

values at 8 equal speed intervals. This curve is populated by 

a test run with a real load. This can be used with any smooth 

load curve including constant load. 

Max Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor 

torque. 

Default: 15% 

Range: 0–400% 

4161 MaxAlarmMar 

Stp 15% 

A 

Load 

Max Alarm 

Basic 

Min Alarm 





Modbus format 

EInt 

Fig. 98 

Default: 

Basic 0 

Load 

Curve 

1 

Basic 


Max Alarm [416] 

Uses a fixed maximum and minimum load 

level over the full speed range. Can be used 

in situations where the torque is independent 

of the speed. 

Uses the measured actual load characteristic 

of the process over the speed range. 




Modbus format 

Load curve 

415 Load Type 

Stp A Basic 

UInt 

UInt 


Max Alarm Margin [4161] 

With load type Basic, [415], used the Max Alarm Margin 

sets the band above the Normal Load, [41B], menu that 

does not generate an alarm. With load type Load Curve, 

[415], used the Max Alarm Margin sets the band above the 

Load Curve, [41C], that does not generate an alarm. The 

Max Alarm delay [4162] 

Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of max 

alarm condition and after when the alarm is given. 

Default: 

Range: 

0.1 s 

0-90 s 





Modbus format 

Max Pre Alarm [417] 

Long, 1=0.1 s 

EInt 

Max Pre AlarmMargin [4171] 

With load type Basic, [415], used the Max Pre-Alarm Margin 

sets the band above the Normal Load, [41B], menu that 

does not generate a pre-alarm. With load type Load Curve, 

[415], used the Max Pre-Alarm Margin sets the band above 

the Load Curve, [41C], that does not generate a pre-alarm. 

The Max Pre-Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal 

motor torque. 

Default: 10% 

Range: 0–400% 

4162 MaxAlarmDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

4171 MaxPreAlMar 

Stp 10% 

A 





Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1% 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Max Pre Alarm delay [4172] 

Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of max pre 


Min Pre Alarm Response delay [4182] 

Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of min pre 


Default: 

Range: 


4182 MinPreAlDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

0.1 s 

0-90 s 

Default: 

Range: 

4172 MaxPreAlDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

0.1 s 

0–90 s 




Long, 1=0.1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 





Modbus format 

Min Pre Alarm [418] 

Long, 1=0.1 s 

EInt 

Min Pre Alarm Margin [4181] 

With load type Basic, [415], used the Min Pre-Alarm Margin 

sets the band under the Normal Load, [41B], menu that 

does not generate a pre-alarm. With load type Load Curve, 

[415], used the Min Pre-Alarm Margin sets the band under 

the Load Curve, [41C], that does not generate a pre-alarm. 

The Min Pre-Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal 

motor torque. 

Default: 10% 

Range: 0-400% 

4181 MinPreAlMar 

Stp 10% 

A 

Min Alarm [419] 

Min Alarm Margin [4191] 

With load type Basic, [415], used the Min Alarm Margin 

sets the band under the Normal Load, [41B], menu that 

does not generate an alarm. With load type Load Curve, 

[415], used the Min Alarm Margin sets the band under the 

Load Curve, [41C], that does not generate an alarm. The 

Max Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor 

torque. 

Default: 15% 

Range: 0-400% 


4191 MinAlarmMar 

Stp 15% 

A 




Modbus format 

EInt 





Modbus format 

EInt 


Min Alarm Response delay [4192] 

Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of min 


Default: 

Range: 

0.1 s 

0-90 s 


4192 MinAlarmDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 




Long, 1=0.1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Autoset Alarm [41A] 

The Autoset Alarm function can measure the nominal load 

that is used as reference for the alarm levels. If the selected 

Load Type [415] is Basic it copies the load the motor is running 

with to the menu Normal Load [41B]. The motor 

must run on the speed that generates the load that needs to 

be recorded. If the selected Load Type [415] is Load Curve it 

performs a test-run and populates the Load Curve [41C] 

with the found load values. 

WARNING: When autoset does a test run the 

motor and application/machine will ramp up 

to maximum speed. 

NOTE: The motor must be running for the Autoset Alarm 

function to succeed. A not running motor generates a 

“Failed!” message. 

The default set levels for the (pre)alarms are: 

Overload 

Underload 

Max Alarm 

Max Pre Alarm 

These default set levels can be manually changed in menus 

[416] to [419]. After execution the message “Autoset OK!” is 

displayed for 1s and the selection reverts to “No”. 

Normal Load [41B] 

Set the level of the normal load. The alarm or pre alarm will 

be activated when the load is above/under normal load ± 

margin. 

Default: 100% 

Range: 


menu [4161] + [41B] 

menu [4171] + [41B] 

Min Pre Alarm menu [41B] - [4181] 

Min Alarm menu [41B] - [4191] 

0-400% of max torque 

NOTE: 100% Torque means: I NOM = I MOT . The maximum 

depends on the motor current and VSD max current 

settings, but the absolute maximum adjustment is 

400%. 




Modbus format 

41B Normal Load 

Stp 100% 

A 

EInt 

41A AutoSet Alrm 

Stp A 

No 

Default: No 

No 0 

Yes 1 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Load Curve [41C] 

The load curve function can be used with any smooth load 

curve. The curve can be populated with a test-run or the values 

can be entered or changed manually. 

Load Curve 1-9 [41C1]-[41C9] 

The measured load curve is based on 9 stored samples. The 

curve starts at minimum speed and ends at maximum speed, 

the range in between is divided into 8 equal steps. The measured 

values of each sample are displayed in [41C1] to 

[41C9] and can be adapted manually. The value of the 1st 

sampled value on the load curve is displayed. 

41C1 Load Curve1 

Stp 0rpm 100% 

A 

Default: 100% 

Range: 

0–400% of max torque 



Min-Max alarm tolerance band graph 

combination and the load of the motor at the time the dip 

occurs, see Fig. 100. 

1 

Min Speed 

Max Speed 

421 Low Volt OR 

Stp A 

On 

Default: 

On 

0.5 

Off 0 At a voltage dip the low voltage trip will protect. 

On 1 

At mains dip, VSD ramps down until voltage 

rises. 

0 

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 


Measured load samples 

Min-max tolerance band 

Max alarm limit 

Min alarm limit 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 


43336%, 43337 rpm, 

43338%, 43339 rpm, 

43340%, 43341 rpm, 

43342%, 43343 rpm, 

43344%, 43345 rpm, 

43346%, 43347 rpm, 

43348%, 43349 rpm, 

43350%, 43351 rpm, 

43352%, 43353 rpm 

DC link voltage 

Override 

level 

Low Volt. 

level 


169/240, 169/242, 

169/244, 169/246, 

169/248, 169/250, 

169/252, 169/254, 

170/1 


t 


Long 

Modbus format 

EInt 

(06-F60new) 

t 

NOTE: The speed values depend on the Min- and Max 

Speed values. they are read only and cannot be 

changed. 

Fig. 99 

11.4.2 Process Protection [420] 

Submenu with settings regarding protection functions for 

the VSD and the motor. 

Low Voltage Override [421] 

If a dip in the mains supply occurs and the low voltage override 

function is enabled, the VSD will automatically 

decrease the motor speed to keep control of the application 

and prevent an under voltage trip until the input voltage 

rises again. Therefore the rotating energy in the motor/load 

is used to keep the DC link voltage level at the override level, 

for as long as possible or until the motor comes to a standstill. 

This is dependent on the inertia of the motor/load 

Fig. 100 Low voltage override 

NOTE: During the low voltage override the LED trip/limit 

blinks. 

Rotor locked [422] 

With the rotor locked function enabled, the VSD will protect 

the motor and application when this is stalled whilst 

increasing the motor speed from standstill. This protection 

will coast the motor to stop and indicate a fault when the 

Torque Limit has been active at very low speed for more 

than 5 seconds. 


Default: Off 

Off 0 No detection 

On 1 


Motor lost [423] 

With the motor lost function enabled, the VSD is able to 

detect a fault in the motor circuit: motor, motor cable, thermal 

relay or output filter. Motor lost will cause a trip, and 

the motor will coast to standstill, when a missing motor 

phase is detected during a period of 5 s. 


VSD will trip when locked rotor is detected. 

Trip message “Locked Rotor”. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Default: 

Off 0 

Trip 1 

422 Rotor locked 

Stp A 

Off 

423 Motor lost 

Stp A 

Off 

Off 

Function switched off to be used if no 

motor or very small motor connected. 

VSD will trip when the motor is disconnected. 

Trip message “Motor Lost”. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Overvolt control [424] 

Used to switch off the overvoltage control function when 

only braking by brake chopper and resistor is required. The 

overvoltage control function, limits the braking torque so 

that the DC link voltage level is controlled at a high, but 

safe, level. This is achieved by limiting the actual deceleration 

rate during stopping. In case of a defect at the brake 

chopper or the brake resistor the VSD will trip for “Overvoltage” 

to avoid a fall of the load e.g. in crane applications. 

NOTE: Overvoltage control should not be activated if 

brake chopper is used. 

Default: On 

On 0 Overvoltage control activated 

Off 1 Overvoltage control off 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

11.5 I/Os and Virtual 

Connections [500] 

Main menu with all the settings of the standard inputs and 

outputs of the VSD. 

11.5.1 Analogue Inputs [510] 

Submenu with all settings for the analogue inputs. 

AnIn1 Function [511] 

Sets the function for Analogue input 1. Scale and range are 

defined by AnIn1 Advanced settings [513]. 

Default: Process Ref 

Off 0 Input is not active 

Max Speed 1 The input acts as an upper speed limit. 

Max Torque 2 The input acts as an upper torque limit. 

Process Val 3 

Process Ref 4 


424 Over Volt Ctl 

Stp A 

On 

511 AnIn1 Fc 

Stp A Process Ref 

The input value equals the actual process 

value (feedback) and is compared to the 

reference signal (set point) by the PID controller, 

or can be used to display and view 

the actual process value. 

Reference value is set for control in process 

units, see Process Source [321] and 

Process Unit [322]. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 


NOTE: When AnInX Func=Off, the connected signal will 

still be available for Comparators [610]. 

Adding analogue inputs 

If more then one analogue input is set to the same function, 

the values of the inputs can be added together. In the following 

examples we assume that Process Source [321] is set to 

Speed. 

Example 1: Add signals with different weight (fine tuning). 

Signal on AnIn1 = 10 mA 

Signal on AnIn2 = 5 mA 

[511] AnIn1 Function = Process Ref. 

[512] AnIn1 Setup = 4-20 mA 

[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = Min (0 rpm) 

[5136] AnIn1 Function Max = Max (1500 rpm) 

[5138] AnIn1 Operation = Add+ 


[515] AnIn2 Setup = 4-20 mA 


[5166] AnIn2 Function Max = User defined 

[5167] AnIn2 Value Max = 300 rpm 


Calculation: 

AnIn1 = (10-4) / (20-4) x (1500-0) + 0 = 562.5 rpm 

AnIn2 = (5-4) / (20-4) x (300-0) + 0 = 18.75 rpm 

The actual process reference will be: 

+562.5 + 18.75 = 581 rpm 

Analogue Input Selection via Digital Inputs: 

When two different external Reference signals are used, e.g. 

4-20mA signal from control centre and a 0-10 V locally 

mounted potentiometer, it is possible to switch between 

these two different analogue input signals via a Digital Input 

set to “AnIn Select”. 

AnIn1 is 4-20 mA 

AnIn2 is 0-10 V 

DigIn3 is controlling the AnIn selection; HIGH is 4-20 mA, 

LOW is 0-10 V 

[511] AnIn1 Fc = Process Ref; 

set AnIn1 as reference signal input 

[512] AnIn1 Setup = 4-20mA; 

set AnIn1 for a current reference signal 

[513A] AnIn1 Enable = DigIn; 

set AnIn1 to be active when DigIn3 is HIGH 

[514] AnIn2 Fc = Process Ref; 

set AnIn2 as reference signal input 

[515] AnIn2 Setup = 0-10V; 

set AnIn2 for a voltage reference signal 

[516A] AnIn2 Enabl = !DigIn; 

set AnIn2 to be active when DigIn3 is LOW 

[523] DigIn3=AnIn; 

set DIgIn3 as input fot selection of AI reference 

Subtracting analogue inputs 

Example 2: Subtract two signals 

Signal on AnIn1 = 8 V 

Signal on AnIn2 = 4 V 


[512] AnIn1 Setup = 0-10 V 





[515] AnIn2 Setup = 0-10 V 



[5168] AnIn2 Operation = Sub- 

Calculation: 

AnIn1 = (8-0) / (10-0) x (1500-0) + 0 = 1200 rpm 

AnIn2 = (4-0) / (10-0) x (1500-0) + 0 = 600 rpm 

The actual process reference will be: 

+1200 - 600 = 600 rpm 

AnIn1 Setup [512] 

The analogue input setup is used to configure the analogue 

input in accordance with the signal used that will be connected 

to the analogue input. With this selection the input 

can be determined as current (4-20 mA) or voltage 

(0-10 V) controlled input. Other selections are available for 

using a threshold (live zero), a bipolar input function, or a 

user defined input range. With a bipolar input reference signal, 

it is possible to control the motor in two directions. See 

Fig. 101. 

NOTE: The selection of voltage or current input is done 

with S1. When the switch is in voltage mode only the 

voltage menu items are selectable. With the switch in 

current mode only the current menu items are 

selectable. 


Default: 

Dependent on 

4–20mA 0 

0–20mA 1 

User mA 2 

User Bipol 

mA 

3 

0–10V 4 

2–10V 5 

User V 6 

User Bipol 

V 

7 

512 AnIn1 Setup 

Stp A 4-20mA 

4-20 mA 

Setting of switch S1 

The current input has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the full 

range for the input signal. See Fig. 103. 

Normal full current scale configuration of 

the input that controls the full range for the 

input signal. See Fig. 102. 

The scale of the current controlled input, 

that controls the full range for the input signal. 

Can be defined by the advanced AnIn 

Min and AnIn Max menus. 

Sets the input for a bipolar current input, 

where the scale controls the range for the 

input signal. Scale can be defined in 

advanced menu AnIn Bipol. 

Normal full voltage scale configuration of 

the input that controls the full range for the 

input signal. See Fig. 102. 

The voltage input has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the full range 

for the input signal. See Fig. 103. 

The scale of the voltage controlled input, 

that controls the full range for the input signal. 

Can be defined by the advanced AnIn 

Min and AnIn Max menus. 

Sets the input for a bipolar voltage input, 

where the scale controls the range for the 

input signal. Scale can be defined in 

advanced menu AnIn Bipol. 

-10 V 

Fig. 101 

100 % 

Fig. 102 Normal full-scale configuration 

100 % 

n 


100 % 

n 

0 

100 % 

10 V 

20 mA 

(NG_06-F21) 

Ref 

0 10 V 

20mA 

(NG_06-F21) 

n 

0–10 V 

0–20 mA 

NOTE: For bipol function, input RunR and RunL needs to 

be active and Rotation, [219] must be set to “R+L”. 

2–10 V 

4–20 mA 

NOTE: Always check the needed set up when the setting 

of S1 is changed; selection will not adapt automatically. 



0 2 V 

4mA 

Fig. 103 2–10 V/4–20 mA (Live Zero) 

10 V 

2 0mA 

Ref 



UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 


AnIn1 Advanced [513] 

NOTE: The different menus will automatically be set to 

either “mA” or “V”, based on the selection in AnIn 1 

Setup [512]. 

AnIn1 Min [5131] 

Parameter to set the minimum value of the external reference 

signal. Only visible if [512] = User mA/V. 

Default: 

Range: 

0 V/4.00 mA 

0.00–20.00 mA 

0–10.00 V 





Long 

Modbus format 

EInt 

AnIn1 Max [5132] 

Parameter to set the maximum value of the external reference 

signal. Only visible if [512] = User mA/V. 

Default: 10.00 V/20.00 mA 

Range: 


513 AnIn1 Advan 

Stp A 

5131 AnIn1 Min 

Stp A 0V/4.00mA 

5132 AnIn1 Max 

Stp 10.0V/20.00mA 

0.00–20.00 mA 

0–10.00 V 

Special function: Inverted reference signal 

If the AnIn minimum value is higher than the AnIn maximum 

value, the input will act as an inverted reference input, 

see Fig. 104. 

100 % 

n 

Fig. 104 Inverted reference 

AnIn1 Bipol [5133] 

This menu is automatically displayed if AnIn1 Setup is set to 

User Bipol mA or User Bipol V. The window will automatically 

show mA or V range according to selected function. 

The range is set by changing the positive maximum value; 

the negative value is automatically adapted accordingly. 

Only visible if [512] = User Bipol mA/V. The inputs RunR 

and RunL input need to be active, and Rotation, [219], 

must be set to “R+L”, to operate the bipolar function on the 

analogue input. 

Default: 

Range: 

0 1 0 V 

0.00–10.00 V 


0.0–20.0 mA, 0.00–10.00 V 




Modbus format 

Long 

EInt 

Invert 

AnIn Min > 

AnIn Max 

Ref 

5133 AnIn1 Bipol 

Stp 10.00V 

A 

(NG_06-F25) 




Modbus format 

Long 

EInt 


AnIn1 Function Min [5134] 

With AnIn1 Function Min the physical minimum value is 

scaled to selected process unit. The default scaling is 

dependent of the selected function of AnIn1 [511]. 

Default: 

Min 

Min 0 Min value 

Max 1 Max value 

Userdefined 

2 Define user value in menu [5135] 

Table 25 shows corresponding values for the min and max 

selections depending on the function of the analogue input 

[511]. 

Table 25 

AnIn Function Min Max 

Speed Min Speed [341] Max Speed [343] 

Torque 0% Max Torque [351] 

Process Ref Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 

Process Value Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

AnIn1 Function Value Min [5135] 

With AnIn1 Function ValMin you define a user-defined 

value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is 

selected in menu [5134]. 

Default: 0.000 

Range: -10000.000 – 10000.000 





Modbus format 

5134 AnIn1 FcMin 

Stp A 

Min 

5135 AnIn1 VaMin 

Stp 0.000 

A 

Long, 

Speed 1=1 rpm 

Torque 1=1% 

Process val 1=0.001 

EInt 

AnIn1 Function Max [5136] 

With AnIn1 Function Max the physical maximum value is 

scaled to selected process unit. The default scaling is 

dependent of the selected function of AnIn1 [511]. See 

Table 25. 

Default: 

Max 



User-defined 2 Define user value in menu [5137] 



DeviceNet no: 

43207 



Modbus format 

AnIn1 Function Value Max [5137] 

With AnIn1 Function VaMax you define a user-defined 




Range: -10000.000 – 10000.000 


Long, 

Speed/Torque 1=1 rpm or %. 

Other 1= 0.001 

EInt 




Modbus format 

5136 AnIn1 FcMax 

Stp A 

Max 

5137 AnIn1 VaMax 

Stp 0.000 

A 

Long, 


Torque 1=1% 


EInt 

NOTE: With AnIn Min, AnIn Max, AnIn Function Min and 

AnIn Function Max settings, loss of feedback signals 

(e.g. voltage drop due to long sensor wiring) can be 

compensated to ensure an accurate process control. 


Example: 

Process sensor is a sensor with the following specification: 

Range: 0–3 bar 

Output: 2–10 mA 

Analogue input should be set up according to: 

[512] AnIn1 Setup = User mA 

[5131] AnIn1 Min = 2 mA 

[5132] AnIn1 Max = 10 mA 

[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = User-defined 

[5135] AnIn1 VaMin = 0.000 bar 

[5136] AnIn 1 Function Max = User-defined 

[5137] AnIn1 VaMax = 3.000 bar 

AnIn1 Operation [5138] 

Default: 

Add+ 0 

Sub- 1 

Add+ 


AnIn1 Filter [5139] 

If the input signal is unstable (e.g. fluctuation reference 

value), the filter can be used to stabilize the signal. A change 

of the input signal will reach 63% on AnIn1 within the set 

AnIn1 Filter time. After 5 times the set time, AnIn1 will 

have reached 100% of the input change. See Fig. 105. 


Analogue signal is added to selected function 

in menu [511]. 

Analogue signal is subtracted from 

selected function in menu [511]. 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Range: 

0.1 s 

0.001 – 10.0 s 

UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

5138 AnIn1 Oper 

Stp A Add+ 

5139 AnIn1 Filt 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

Long, 1=0.001 s 

EInt 

AnIn change 

100% 

63% 

Fig. 105 

AnIn1 Enable [513A] 

Parameter for enable/disable analogue input selection via 

digital inputs (DigIn set to function AnIn Select). 

Default: 

On 

Original input signal 

On 0 AnIn1 is always active 

!DigIn 1 AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is low. 

DigIn 2 AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is high. 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: AnIn1 43210 

Profibus slot/index AnIn1 169/114 


UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 


Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2. 

Same function as AnIn1 Func [511]. 

Default: Off 



T 

Filtered AnIn signal 

5 X T 

513A AnIn1 Enabl 

Stp A 

On 

514 AnIn2 Fc 

Stp A 

Off 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 




Same functions as AnIn1 Setup [512]. 

Default: 4 – 20 mA 

Dependent on Setting of switch S2 

Selection: Same as in menu [512]. 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 


Same functions and submenus as under AnIn1 Advanced 

[513]. 





Stp A 4-20mA 


Stp A 




43213–43220 

43542 

43552 

169/117–124 

170/191 

170/201 



Default: 

4–20 mA 







Modbus format 



[513]. 





Stp A 4-20mA 

AnIn4 Function [51A] 



UInt 

UInt 


Stp A 

43223–43230 

43543 

43553 

169/127–169/134 

170/192 

170/202 

517 AnIn3 Fc 

Stp A 

Default: Off 


Off 

51A AnIn4 Fc 

Stp A 

Default: Off 


Off 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 


AnIn4 Set-up [51B] 


Default: 

4-20 mA 







Modbus format 

AnIn4 Advanced [51C] 


[513]. 




51B AnIn4 Setup 

Stp A 4-20mA 

UInt 

UInt 

51C AnIn4 Advan 

Stp A 

43233–43240 

43544 

43554 

169/137–144 

170/193 

170/203 

11.5.2 Digital Inputs [520] 

Submenu with all the settings for the digital inputs. 

NOTE: Additional inputs will become available when the 

I/O option boards are connected. 

Digital Input 1 [521] 

To select the function of the digital input. 

On the standard control board there are eight digital inputs. 

If the same function is programmed for more than one input 

that function will be activated according to “OR” logic if 

nothing else is stated. 

Default: RunL 

Off 0 The input is not active. 

Ext. Trip 3 

Stop 4 

Enable 5 

RunR 6 

RunL 7 

Be aware that if there is nothing connected 

to the input, the VSD will trip at “External 

trip” immediately. 

NOTE: The External Trip is active low. 

NOTE: Activated according to “AND” logic. 

Stop command according to the selected 

Stop mode in menu [33B]. 

NOTE: The Stop command is active low. 


Enable command. General start condition 

to run the VSD. If made low during running 

the output of the VSD is cut off immediately, 

causing the motor to coast to zero 

speed. 

NOTE: If none of the digital inputs are programmed 

to “Enable”, the internal enable 

signal is active. 


Run Right command. The output of the 

VSD will be a clockwise rotary field. 

Run Left command. The output of the VSD 

will be a counter-clockwise rotary field. 

Reset command. To reset a Trip condition 

Reset 9 

and to enable the Autoreset function. 

Preset Ctrl1 10 To select the Preset Reference. 



MotPot Up 13 

MotPot 

Down 

14 

521 DigIn 1 

Stp A 

RunL 

Increases the internal reference value 

according to the set AccMotPot time [333]. 

Has the same function as a “real” motor 

potentiometer, see Fig. 86. 

Decreases the internal reference value 

according to the set DecMotPot time [334]. 

See MotPot Up. 


Pump1 

Feedb 

Pump2 

Feedb 

Pump3 

Feedb 

Pump4 

Feedb 

Pump5 

Feedb 

Pump6 

Feedb 

Timer 1 

Timer 2 

Set Ctrl 1 

Set Ctrl 2 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

Mot PreMag 25 

Jog 26 

Ext Mot 

Temp 

Loc/Rem 

27 

28 

AnIn select 29 

LC Level 30 

Feedback input pump1 for Pump/Fan control 

and informs about the status of the 

auxiliary connected pump/fan. 

Feedback input pump 2 for Pump/Fan control 















Timer 1 Delay [643] will be activated on the 

rising edge of this signal. 

Timer 2 Delay [653] will be activated on the 

rising edge of this signal. 

Activates other parameter set. See Table 

26 for selection possibilities. 

Activates other parameter set. See Table 

26 for selection possibilities. 

Pre-magnetises the motor. Used for faster 

motor start. 

To activate the Jog function. Gives a Run 

command with the set Jog speed and 

Direction, page 97. 

Be aware that if there is nothing connected 

to the input, the VSD will trip at “External 

Motor Temp” immediately. 

NOTE: The External Motor Temp is active 

low. 

Activate local mode defined in [2171] and 

[2172]. 

Activate/deactivate analogue inputs 

defined in [513A], [516A], [519A] and 

[51CA] 

Liquid cooling low level signal. 

NOTE: The Liquid Cooling Level is active 

low. 

NOTE: For bipol function, input RunR and RunL needs to 

be active and Rotation, [219] must be set to “R+L”. 

Table 26 

Parameter Set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2 

A 0 0 

B 1 0 

C 0 1 

D 1 1 

NOTE: To activate the parameter set selection, menu 

241 must be set to DigIn. 

Digital Input 2 [522] to Digital Input 8 

[528] 

Same function as DigIn 1 [521]. Default function for DigIn 

8 is Reset. For DigIn 3 to 7 the default function is Off. 

Default: RunR 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Additional digital inputs [529] to [52H] 

Additional digital inputs with I/O option board installed, 

B1 DigIn 1 [529] - B3 DigIn 3 [52H]. B stands for board 

and 1 to 3 is the number of the board which is related to the 

position of the I/O option board on the option mounting 

plate. The functions and selections are the same as DigIn 1 

[521]. 





Modbus format 

522 DigIn 2 

Stp A 

Int 

Int 

RunR 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 


11.5.3 Analogue Outputs [530] 

Submenu with all settings for the analogue outputs. Selections 

can be made from application and VSD values, in 

order to visualize actual status. Analogue outputs can also be 

used as a mirror of the analogue input. Such a signal can be 

used as: 

• a reference signal for the next VSD in a Master/Slave 

configuration (see Fig. 106). 

• a feedback acknowledgement of the received analogue 

reference value. 

AnOut1 Function [531] 

Sets the function for the Analogue Output 1. Scale and 

range are defined by AnOut1 Advanced settings [533]. 

Default: 


Process Val 0 

Actual process value according to Process 

feedback signal. 

Speed 1 Actual speed. 

Torque 2 Actual torque. 

Process Ref 3 Actual process reference value. 

Shaft Power 4 Actual shaft power. 

Frequency 5 Actual frequency. 

Current 6 Actual current. 

El power 7 Actual electrical power. 

Output volt 8 Actual output voltage. 

DC-voltage 9 Actual DC link voltage. 

AnIn1 10 

AnIn2 11 

AnIn3 12 

AnIn4 13 

531 AnOut1 Fc 

StpA 


Mirror of received signal value on 

AnIn1. 


AnIn2. 


AnIn3. 


AnIn4. 

AnOut 1 Setup [532] 

Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration. 

Default: 

4–20mA 0 

0–20mA 1 

User mA 2 

User Bipol 

mA 

3 

0-10V 4 

2–10V 5 

User V 6 

User Bipol V 7 

4-20mA 


The current output has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the full 

range for the output signal. See Fig. 103. 

Normal full current scale configuration of 

the output that controls the full range for 

the output signal. See Fig. 102. 

The scale of the current controlled output 

that controls the full range for the output 

signal. Can be defined by the advanced 

AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus. 

Sets the output for a bipolar current output, 

where the scale controls the range 

for the output signal. Scale can be 

defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol. 

Normal full voltage scale configuration of 

the output that controls the full range for 

the output signal. See Fig. 102. 

The voltage output has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the full 

range for the output signal. See Fig. 103. 

The scale of the voltage controlled output 

that controls the full range for the output 

signal. Can be defined by the advanced 

AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus. 

Sets the output for a bipolar voltage output, 

where the scale controls the range 

for the output signal. Scale can be 

defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol. 




Modbus format 

532 AnOut1 Setup 

Stp A 4-20mA 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: When selections AnIn1, AnIn2 …. AnIn4 is 

selected, the setup of the AnOut (menu [532] or [535]) 

has to be set to 0-10V or 0-20mA. When the AnOut Setup 

is set to e.g. 4-20mA, the mirroring is not working 

correct. 

Ref. 

VSD 1 

Master 

Ref. 

VSD 2 

Slave 


AnOut 




UInt 

Fig. 106 

Modbus format 

UInt 


AnOut1 Advanced [533] 

With the functions in the AnOut1 Advanced menu, the output 

can be completely defined according to the application 

needs. The menus will automatically be adapted to “mA” or 

“V”, according to the selection in AnOut1 Setup [532]. 

AnOut1 Min [5331] 

This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or 

User V is selected in menu AnOut 1 Setup [532]. The menu 

will automatically adapt to current or voltage setting according 

to the selected setup. Only visible if [532] = User mA/V. 

Default: 

Range: 

4 mA 


AnOut1 Max [5332] 

This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or 

User V is selected in menu AnOut1 Setup [532]. The menu 

will automatically adapt to current or voltage setting according 

to the selected setup. Only visible if [532] = User mA/V. 


0.00 – 20.00 mA, 0 – 10.00 V 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Range: 

20.00 mA 

EInt 

0.00–20.00 mA, 0–10.00 V 




Modbus format 

533 AnOut 1 Adv 

Stp A 

5331 AnOut 1 Min 

Stp A 

4mA 

5332 AnOut 1 Max 

Stp 20.0mA 

EInt 

AnOut1 Bipol [5333] 

Automatically displayed if User Bipol mA or User Bipol V is 

selected in menu AnOut1 Setup. The menu will automatically 

show mA or V range according to the selected function. 

The range is set by changing the positive maximum value; 

the negative value is automatically adapted accordingly. 

Only visible if [512] = User Bipol mA/V. 

Default: 

Range: 


-10.00–10.00 V 

-10.00–10.00 V, -20.0–20.0 mA 




Modbus format 

EInt 

AnOut1 Function Min [5334] 

With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value is 

scaled to selected presentation. The default scaling is 

dependent of the selected function of AnOut1 [531]. 

Default: 

Min 



User-defined 2 Define user value in menu [5335] 

Table 27 shows corresponding values for the min and max 

selections depending on the function of the analogue output 

[531]. 

Table 27 

AnOut 

Function 

5333 AnOut1Bipol 

Stp -10.00-10.00V 

5334 AnOut1FCMin 

Stp A 

Min 

Min Value 

Max Value 

Process Value Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 

Speed Min Speed [341] Max Speed [343] 

Torque 0% Max Torque [351] 

Process Ref Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 

Shaft Power 0% Motor Power [223] 

Frequency 0 Hz Motor Frequency [222] 

Current 0 A Motor Current [224] 

El Power 0 W Motor Power [223] 

Output Voltage 0 V Motor Voltage [221] 


Table 27 

AnOut 

Function 

DC voltage 0 V 1000 V 

AnIn1 

AnIn2 

AnIn3 

AnIn4 


AnIn1 Function Value Min [5335] 

With AnOut1 Function VaMin you define a user-defined 




AnIn1 Function Min AnIn1 Function Max 







Modbus format 


Range: -10000.000–10000.000 




Modbus format 

Min Value 

5335 AnOut1VaMin 

Stp 0.000 

A 

Max Value 

Long, 

1=0.1 W, 0.1 Hz, 0.1 A, 

0.1 V or 0.001 

EInt 

Long, 


Torque 1=1% 


EInt 

AnOut1 Function Max [5336] 

With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value is 

scaled to selected presentation. The default scaling is 

dependent on the selected function of AnOut1 [531]. See 

Table 27. 

5336 AnOut1FCMax 

Stp A 

Max 

Default: Max 



User defined 2 Define user value in menu [5337] 




Fieldbus format Long, 0.001 

Modbus format 

AnOut1 Function Value Max [5337] 

With AnOut1 Function VaMax you define a user-defined 




AnOut2 Function [534] 

Sets the function for the Analogue Output 2. 


EInt 

NOTE: It is possible to set AnOut1 up as an inverted 

output signal by setting AnOut1 Min > AnOut1 Max. See 

Fig. 104. 


Range: -10000.000–10000.000 




Modbus format 

Long, 


Torque 1=1% 


EInt 

Default: Torque 





Modbus format 

5337 AnOut1VaMax 

Stp 0.000 

A 

534 AnOut2 Fc 

Stp A Torque 

UInt 

UInt 


AnOut2 Setup [535] 

Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration for analogue 

output 2. 

Default: 4-20mA 






Modbus format 

AnOut2 Advanced [536] 

Same functions and submenus as under AnOut1 Advanced 

[533]. 




535 AnOut2 Setup 

Stp A 4-20mA 

UInt 

UInt 

536 AnOut2 Advan 

Stp A 

43263–43267 

43546 

43556 

169/167–169/171 

170/195 

170/205 

11.5.4 Digital Outputs [540] 

Submenu with all the settings for the digital outputs. 

Digital Out 1 [541] 

Sets the function for the digital output 1. 

NOTE: The definitions described here are valid for the 

active output condition. 

Default: 

Off 0 

On 1 

Ready 

Output is not active and constantly 

low. 

Output is made constantly high, i.e. 

for checking circuits and trouble 

shooting. 

Run 2 

Running. The VSD output is active = 

produces current for the motor. 

Stop 3 The VSD output is not active. 

0Hz 4 

The output frequency=0±0.1Hz when 

in Run condition. 

Acc/Dec 5 

The speed is increasing or decreasing 

along the acc. ramp dec. ramp. 

At Process 6 The output = Reference. 

At Max spd 7 

The frequency is limited by the Maximum 

Speed. 

No Trip 8 No Trip condition active. 

Trip 9 A Trip condition is active. 

AutoRst Trip 10 Autoreset trip condition active. 

Limit 11 A Limit condition is active. 

Warning 12 A Warning condition is active. 

Ready 13 

T= T lim 14 

I>I nom 15 

Brake 16 

Sgnl

Max Alarm 20 

Max PreAlarm 21 

Min Alarm 22 

The max alarm level has been 

reached. 

The max pre alarm level has been 

reached. 

The min alarm level has been 

reached. 

Min PreAlarm 23 

The min pre alarm Level has been 

reached. 

LY 24 Logic output Y. 

!LY 25 Logic output Y inverted. 

LZ 26 Logic output Z. 

!LZ 27 Logic output Z inverted. 

CA 1 28 Analogue comparator 1 output. 

!A1 29 Analogue comp 1 inverted output. 

CA 2 30 Analogue comparator 2 output. 

!A2 31 Analogue comp 2 inverted output. 

CD 1 32 Digital comparator 1 output. 

!D1 33 Digital comp 1 inverted output. 

CD 2 34 Digital comparator 2 output. 

!D2 35 Digital comp 2 inverted output. 

Operation 36 

Run command is active or VSD running. 

The signal can be used to control 

the mains contactor if the VSD is 

equipped with Standby supply option. 

T1Q 37 Timer1 output 

!T1Q 38 Timer1 inverted output 

T2Q 39 Timer2 output 

!T2Q 40 Timer2 inverted output 

Sleeping 41 Sleeping function activated 

Crane Deviat 42 Tripped on deviation 

PumpSlave1 43 Activate pump slave 1 






PumpMaster1 49 Activate pump master 1 






All Pumps 55 All pumps are running 

Only Master 56 Only the master is running 

Loc/Rem 57 Local/Rem function is active 

Standby 58 Standby supply option is active 

PTC Trip 59 Trip when function is active 

PT100 Trip 60 Trip when function is active 

Overvolt 61 Overvoltage due to high main voltage 

Overvolt G 62 Overvoltage due to generation mode 

Overvolt D 63 Overvoltage due to deceleration 

Acc 64 Acceleration along the acc. ramp 

Dec 65 Deceleration along the dec. ramp 

I 2 t 66 I 2 t limit protection active 

V-Limit 67 Overvoltage limit function active 

C-Limit 68 Overcurrent limit function active 

Overtemp 69 Over temperature warning 

Low voltage 70 Low voltage warning 

DigIn 1 71 Digital input 1 








ManRst Trip 79 

Active trip that needs to be manually 

reset 

Com Error 80 Serial communication lost 

External Fan 81 

The VSD requires external cooling. 

Internal fans are active. 

LC Pump 82 Activate liquid cooling pump 

LC HE Fan 83 

Activate liquid cooling heat exchanger 

fan 

LC Level 84 Liquid cooling low level signal active 

Run Right 85 


Positive speed (>0.5%), i.e. forward/ 

clockwise direction. 

Run Left 86 

Negative speed (≤0.5%), i.e. reverse 

counter clockwise direction. 

Com Active 87 Fieldbus communication active. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 


Digital Out 2 [542] 

Relay 2 [552] 





Sets the function for the digital output 2. 

Sets the function for the relay output 2. 

542 DigOut2 

Stp A No Trip 

Default: No trip 


552 Relay 2 

Stp A 

Default: Run 


Run 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

11.5.5 Relays [550] 

Submenu with all the settings for the relay outputs. The 

relay mode selection makes it possible to establish a “fail 

safe” relay operation by using the normal closed contact to 

function as the normal open contact. 

NOTE: Additional relays will become available when I/O 

option boards are connected. Maximum 3 boards with 3 

relays each. 

Relay 3 [553] 

Sets the function for the relay output 3. 

553 Relay 3 

Stp A 

Default: Off 


Off 

Relay 1 [551] 

Sets the function for the relay output 1. Same function as 

digital output 1 [541] can be selected. 

Default: Trip 






Modbus format 

551 Relay 1 

Stp A 

UInt 

UInt 

Trip 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Board Relay [554] to [55C] 

These additional relays are only visible if an I/O option 

board is fitted in slot 1, 2, or 3. The outputs are named B1 

Relay 1–3, B2 Relay 1–3 and B3 Relay 1–3. B stands for 

board and 1–3 is the number of the board which is related to 

the position of the I/O option board on the option mounting 

plate. 

NOTE: Visible only if optional board is detected or if any 

input/output is activated. 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Relay Advanced [55D] 

This function makes it possible to ensure that the relay will 

also be closed when the VSD is malfunctioning or powered 

down. 

Example 

A process always requires a certain minimum flow. To control 

the required number of pumps by the relay mode NC, 

the e.g. the pumps can be controlled normally by the pump 

control, but are also activated when the variable speed drive 

is tripped or powered down. 

Relay 1 Mode [55D1] 

Default: 

N.O 0 

N.C 1 

N.O 


Relay Modes [55D2] to [55DC] 

Same function as for relay 1 mode [55D1]. 


55D Relay Adv 

Stp A 

55D1 Relay Mode 

Stp A 

N.O 

The normal open contact of the relay will 

be activated when the function is active. 

The normally closed contact of the relay 

will act as a normal open contact. The 

contact will be opened when function is 

not active and closed when function is 

active. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

11.5.6 Virtual Connections [560] 

Functions to enable eight internal connections of comparator, 

timer and digital signals, without occupying physical 

digital in/outputs. Virtual connections are used to wireless 

connection of a digital output function to a digital input 

function. Available signals and control functions can be used 

to create your own specific functions. 

Example of start delay 

The motor will start in RunR 10 seconds after DigIn1 gets 

high. DigIn1 has a time delay of 10 s. 

Menu Parameter Setting 

[521] DigIn1 Timer 1 

[561] VIO 1 Dest RunR 

[562] VIO 1 Source T1Q 

[641] Timer1 Trig DigIn 1 

[642] Timer1 Mode Delay 

[643] Timer1 Delay 0:00:10 

NOTE: When a digital input and a virtual destination are 

set to the same function, this function will act as an OR 

logic function. 

Virtual Connection 1 Destination [561] 

With this function the destination of the virtual connection 

is established. When a function can be controlled by several 

sources, e.g. VC destination or Digital Input, the function 

will be controlled in conformity with “OR logic”. See DigIn 

for descriptions of the different selections. 

Default: 

Selection: 

Off 


Same selections as for Digital Input 1, 

menu [521]. 




Modbus format 

561 VIO 1 Dest 

Stp A 

Off 

UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

43277–43278, 

43521–43529 

169/181–169/182, 

170/170–170/178 

UInt 

UInt 


Virtual Connection 1 Source [562] 

With this function the source of the virtual connection is 

defined. See DigOut 1 for description of the different selections. 

Default: 

Off 

Selection: Same as for menu [541]. 





Modbus format 

Virtual Connections 2-8 [563] to [56G] 

Same function as virtual connection 1 [561] and [562]. 

Communication information for virtual connections 2-8 

Destination. 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

43283, 43285, 43287, 

43289, 43291, 43293, 

43295 

169/ 187, 189, 191, 

193, 195, 197, 199 

UInt 

UInt 

Communication information for virtual connections 2-8 

Source. 




Modbus format 

562 VIO 1 Source 

Stp A 

Off 

43284, 43286, 43288, 

43290, 43292, 43294, 

43296 

169/ 188, 190, 192, 

194, 196, 198, 200 

UInt 

UInt 

11.6.1 Comparators [610] 

The comparators available make it possible to monitor different 

internal signals and values, and visualize via digital 

output or a contact, when a specific value or status is reached 

or established. 

There are 2 analogue comparators that compare any available 

analogue value (including the analogue reference inputs) 

with two adjustable constants. 

For the two analogue comparators two different constants 

are available, Level HI and Level LO. With these two levels, 

it is possible to create a clear hysteresis for the analogue comparator 

between setting and resetting the comparator output. 

This function gives a clear difference in switching levels, 

which lets the process adapt until a certain action is started. 

With such a hysteresis, even an instable analogue signal can 

be monitored without getting a nervous comparator signal. 

Another function is to get a clear indication that a certain 

situation has occurred; the comparator can latch by set Level 

LO to a higher value than Level HI. 

There are 2 digital comparators that compare any available 

digital signal. 

The output signals of these comparators can be logically tied 

together to yield a logical output signal. 

All the output signals can be programmed to the digital or 

relay outputs or used as a source for the virtual connections 

[560]. 

Analogue Comparator 1 Value [611] 

Selection of the analogue value for Analogue Comparator 1 

(CA1). 

Analogue comparator 1 compares the selectable analogue 

value in menu [611] with the constant Level HI in menu 

[612] and constant Level LO in menu [613]. When the 

value exceeds the upper limit level high, the output signal 

CA1 becomes high and !A1 low, see Fig. 107. When the 

value then decreases below the lower limit, the output signal 

CA1 becomes low and !A1 high. 

The output signal can be programmed as a virtual connection 

source and to the digital or relay outputs. 

Analogue value: 

Menu [611] 

Adjustable Level HI. 

Menu [612] 

0 

Signal:CA1 

11.6 Logical Functions and 

Timers [600] 

With the Comparators, Logic Functions and Timers, conditional 

signals can be programmed for control or signalling 

features. This gives you the ability to compare different signals 

and values in order to generate monitoring/controlling 

features. 

Adjustable Level LO. 

Menu [613] 

Fig. 107 Analogue Comparator 

1 

(NG_06-F125) 


611 CA1 Value 

Stp A Speed 

Default: 


Process Val 0 Set by Unit [310] 

Speed 1 rpm 

Torque 2 % 

Shaft Power 3 kW 

El Power 4 kW 

Current 5 A 

Output Volt 6 V 

Frequency 7 Hz 

DC Voltage 8 V 

Heatsink Tmp 9 °C 

PT100_1 10 °C 

PT100_2 11 °C 

PT100_3 12 °C 

Energy 13 kWh 

Run Time 14 h 

Mains Time 15 h 

AnIn1 16 % 

AnIn2 17 % 

AnIn3 18 % 

AnIn4 19 % 


Menu Function Setting 

511 AnIn1 Function Process reference 

512 AnIn1 Set-up 4-20 mA, threshold is 4 mA 

341 Min Speed 0 

343 Max Speed 1500 

611 CA1 Value AnIn1 

612 CA1 Level HI 16% (3.2mA/20mA x 100%) 

613 CA1 Level LO 12% (2.4mA/20mA x 100%) 

561 VIO 1 Dest RunR 

562 VIO 1 Source CA1 

215 Run/Stp Ctrl Remote 

Reference signal AnIn1 

Max speed 

20 mA 

4 mA 

CA1 Level HI = 16% 

3.2 mA 

CA1 Level LO = 12% 

2.4 mA 

t 

CA1 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

Example 

Create automatic RUN/STOP signal via the analogue reference 

signal. Analogue current reference signal, 4-20 mA, is 

connected to Analogue Input 1. AnIn1 Setup, menu [512] = 

4-20 mA and the threshold is 4 mA. Full scale (100%) input 

signal on AnIn 1 = 20 mA. When the reference signal on 

AnIn1 increases 80% of the threshold (4 mA x 0.8 = 3.2 

mA), the VSD will be set in RUN mode. When the signal 

on AnIn1 goes below 60% of the threshold (4 mA x 0.6 = 

2.4 mA) the VSD is set to STOP mode. The output of CA1 

is used as a virtual connection source that controls the virtual 

connection destination RUN. 

Mode 

RUN 

STOP 

Fig. 108 

T 

1 2 3 4 5 6 


No. 

Description 


1 

2 

3 

T 

4 

5 

6 

The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 

below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output stays 

low, mode=RUN. 

The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 

below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output is set 

high, mode=RUN. 

The reference signal passes the threshold level of 4 mA, 

the motor speed will now follow the reference signal. 

During this period the motor speed will follow the reference 

signal. 

The reference signal reaches the threshold level, motor 

speed is 0 rpm, mode = RUN. 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 output stays 

high, mode =RUN. 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 output=STOP. 

Analogue Comparator 1 Level High 

[612] 

Selects the analogue comparator constant high level according 

to the selected value in menu [611]. 

The default value is 300. 




Modbus format 

Long, 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 

0.1 Hz, 0.1°C, 1 kWh, 

1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 

via process value 

EInt 

Example 

This example describes the normal use of the constant level 

high and low. 

Menu Function Setting 

343 Max Speed 1500 

611 CA1 Value Speed 

612 CA1 Level HI 300 rpm 

613 CA1 Level LO 200 rpm 

561 VC1 Dest Timer 1 

562 VC1 Source CA1 

Default: 

Range: 

612 CA1 Level HI 

Stp A 300rpm 

300 rpm 

Enter a value for the high level. 

MAX 

speed 

[343] 

300 

200 

CA1 Level HI [612] 

Hysteresis 

CA1 Level LO [613] 

Mode Min Max Decimals 

Process 0 3 

Speed, rpm 0 Max speed 0 

t 

Torque, % 0 Max torque 0 

Shaft Power, kW 0 Motor P n x4 0 

Output 

CA1 

High 

El Power, kW 0 Motor P n x4 0 

Current, A 0 Motor I n x4 1 

Low 

Output volt, V 0 1000 1 

Frequency, Hz 0 400 1 

DC voltage, V 0 1250 1 

Fig. 109 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

Heatsink temp, °C 0 100 1 

PT 100_1_2_3, °C -100 300 1 

Energy, kWh 0 1000000 0 

Run time, h 0 65535 0 

Mains time, h 0 65535 0 

AnIn 1-4% 0 100 0 


No. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

Description 


below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 does not 

change, output stays low. 


below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output is 

set high. 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 does not 

change, output stays high. 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 is reset, 

output is set low. 


below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 does not 

change, output stays low. 


below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output is 

set high. 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 does not 

change, output stays high. 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 is reset, 

output is set low. 

Analogue Comparator 2 Value [614] 

Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 value. 

Default: 

Torque 

Selections: Same as in menu [611] 





Modbus format 

614 CA2 Value 

Stp A Torque 

UInt 

UInt 

Analogue Comparator 2 Level High 

[615] 

Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level high. 

615 CA2 Level HI 

Stp 20% 

A 

Analogue Comparator 1 Level Low 

[613] 

Selects the analogue comparator constant low level according 

to the selected value in menu [611]. 

For default value see selection table for menu [612]. 

Default: 

Range: 

200 rpm 


Enter a value for the low level. 




Modbus format 

613 CA1 Level LO 

Stp A 200rpm 

Long, 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 

0.1 Hz, 0.1°C, 1 kWh, 

1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 


EInt 

Default: 20% 

Range: 


Enter a value for the high level. 




Modbus format 

Long 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 

0.1 Hz, 0.1°C, 1 kWh, 

1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 


EInt 

Analogue Comparator 2 Level Low 

[616] 

Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low. 

Default: 10% 

Range: 

616 CA2 Level LO 

Stp 10% 

A 

Enter a value for the low level. 






Modbus format 

Digital Comparator 1 [617] 

Selection of the input signal for digital comparator 1 (CD1). 

The output signal CD1 becomes high if the selected input 

signal is active. See Fig. 110. 

The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay 

outputs or used as a source for the virtual connections [560]. 

Digital signal: 

Menu [617] 

+ 

- 

DComp 1 

Long, 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 

0.1 Hz, 0.1°C, 1 kWh, 

1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 


EInt 

Signal: CD1 

(NG_06-F126) 





Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

11.6.2 Logic Output Y [620] 

By means of an expression editor, the comparator signals can 

be logically combined into the Logic Y function. 

The expression editor has the following features: 

• The following signals can be used: 

CA1, CA2, CD1, CD2 or LZ (or LY) 

• The following signals can be inverted: 

!A1, !A2, !D1, !D2, or !LZ (or !LY) 

• The following logical operators are available: 

"+" : OR operator 

"&" : AND operator 

"^" : EXOR operator 

Expressions according to the following truth table can be 

made: 

Fig. 110 Digital comparator 

Input 

Result 

Default: 

Run 

Selection: Same selections as for DigOut 1 [541]. 





Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

Digital Comparator 2 [618] 

Function is identical to digital comparator 1. 

Default: DigIn 1 

617 CD1 

Stp A 

Run 

618 CD 2 

Stp DigIn 1 

A 

Selection: Same selections as for DigOut 1 [541]. 

A B & (AND) + (OR) ^(EXOR) 

0 0 0 0 0 

0 1 0 1 1 

1 0 0 1 1 

1 1 1 1 0 


outputs or used as a Virtual Connection Source [560]. 

620 LOGIC Y 

Stp CA1&!A2&CD1 





Modbus format 

Long 

Text 

The expression must be programmed by means of the 

menus [621] to [625]. 


Example: 

Broken belt detection for Logic Y 

This example describes the programming for a so-called 

“broken belt detection” for fan applications. 

The comparator CA1 is set for frequency>10Hz. 

The comparator !A2 is set for load < 20%. 

The comparator CD1 is set for Run. 

The 3 comparators are all AND-ed, given the “broken belt 

detection”. 

In menus [621]-[625] expression entered for Logic Y is visible. 

Set menu [621] to CA1 

Set menu [622] to & 

Set menu [623] to !A2 

Set menu [624] to & 

Set menu [625] to CD1 

Menu [620] now holds the expression for Logic Y: 

CA1&!A2&CD1 

which is to be read as: 

(CA1&!A2)&CD1 

NOTE: Set menu [624] to "." to finish the expression 

when only two comparators are required for Logic Y. 

Y Comp 1 [621] 

Selects the first comparator for the logic Y function. 

Default: 

CA1 0 

!A1 1 

CA2 2 

!A2 3 

CD1 4 

!D1 5 

CD2 6 

!D2 7 

LZ/LY 8 

!LZ/!LY 9 

T1 10 

!T1 11 

T2 12 

!T2 13 

621 Y Comp 1 

Stp A 

CA1 

CA1 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Y Operator 1 [622] 

Selects the first operator for the logic Y function. 

Default: 

& 

& 1 &=AND 

+ 2 +=OR 

^ 3 ^=EXOR 





Modbus format 

Y Comp 2 [623] 

Selects the second comparator for the logic Y function. 

Default: !A2 

Selection: Same as menu [621] 


UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

622 Y Operator 1 

Stp A 

& 

623 Y Comp 2 

Stp !A2 

A 

UInt 

UInt 


Y Operator 2 [624] 

Selects the second operator for the logic Y function. 

Z Comp 1 [631] 

Selects the first comparator for the logic Z function. 

624 Y Operator 2 

Stp A 

& 

631 Z Comp 1 

Stp A 

CA1 

Default: 

. 0 


Y Comp 3 [625] 

Selects the third comparator for the logic Y function. 


11.6.3 Logic Output Z [630] 

& 

& 1 &=AND 

+ 2 +=OR 

^ 3 ^=EXOR 

When · (dot) is selected, the Logic Y 

expression is finished (when only two 

expressions are tied together). 




Modbus format 

Default: 

CD1 


UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

625 Y Comp 3 

Stp A 

630 LOGIC Z 

StpA 

CA1&!A2&CD1 

UInt 

UInt 

CD1 

The expression must be programmed by means of the 

menus [631] to [635]. 

Default: 

CA1 






Modbus format 

Z Operator 1 [632] 

Selects the first operator for the logic Z function. 

Default: 

& 



Z Comp 2 [633] 

Selects the second comparator for the logic Z function. 


UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

Default: !A2 


UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

632 Z Operator 1 

Stp A 

& 

633 Z Comp 2 

Stp !A2 

A 

UInt 

UInt 


Z Operator 2 [634] 

Selects the second operator for the logic Z function. 

Default: 

634 Z Operator 2 

Stp A 

& 

& 



outputs used in logic functions [620] and [630], or as a virtual 

connection source [560]. 

NOTE: The actual timers are common for all parameter 

sets. If the actual set is changed, the timer functionality 

[641] to [645] will change according set settings but the 

timer value will stay unchanged. So initialization of the 

timer might differ for a set change compared to normal 

triggering of a timer. 





Modbus format 

Z Comp 3 [635] 

Selects the third comparator for the logic Z function. 

Default: 

CD1 



UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

635 Z Comp 3 

StpA 

UInt 

UInt 

CD1 

11.6.4 Timer1 [640] 

The Timer functions can be used as a delay timer or as an 

interval with separate On and Off times (alternate mode). In 

delay mode, the output signal T1Q becomes high if the set 

delay time is expired. See Fig. 111. 

Timer1 Trig 

T1Q 

T1 T2 T1 T2 

Fig. 112 

Timer 1 Trig [641] 

641 Timer1 Trig 

Stp A 

Off 

Default: Off 

Selection: Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu [541]. 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Timer 1 Mode [642] 

642 Timer1 Mode 

Stp A 

Off 

Timer1 Trig 

T1Q 

Default: 

Off 0 

Delay 1 

Alternate 2 

Off 

Timer1 delay 

Fig. 111 

In alternate mode, the output signal T1Q will switch automatically 

from high to low etc. according to the set interval 

times. See Fig. 112. 






Modbus format 

Timer 1 Delay [643] 

This menu is only visible when timer mode is set to delay. 

This menu can only be edited as in alternative 2, see section 

9.5, page 55. 

Timer 1 delay sets the time that will be used by the first 

timer after it is activated. Timer 1 can be activated by a high 

signal on a DigIn that is set to Timer 1 or via a virtual destination 

[560]. 

Default: 

0:00:00 (hr:min:sec) 

Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 





Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

643 Timer1Delay 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

43433 hours 

43434 minutes 

43435 seconds 

170/82, 170/83, 

170/84 

UInt 

UInt 

Timer 1 T1 [644] 

When timer mode is set to Alternate and Timer 1 is enabled, 

this timer will automatically keep on switching according to 

the independently programmable up and down times. The 

Timer 1 in Alternate mode can be enabled by a digital input 

or via a virtual connection. See Fig. 112. Timer 1 T1 sets the 

up time in the alternate mode. 

644 Timer 1 T1 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 





Modbus format 

Timer 1 T2 [645] 

Timer 1 T2 sets the down time in the alternate mode. 

Default: 

0:00:00, hr:min:sec 

Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 





Modbus format 

Timer 1 Value [649] 

Timer 1 Value shows actual value of the timer. 


43436 hours 

43437 minutes 

43438 seconds 

170/85, 170/86, 

170/87 

UInt 

UInt 

43439 hours 

43440 minutes 

43441 seconds 

170/88, 170/89, 

170/90 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: Timer 1 T1 [644] and Timer 2 T1 [654] are only 

visible when Timer Mode is set to Alternate. 

Default: 

645 Timer1 T2 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

649 Timer1 Value 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 

Default: 

0:00:00 (hr:min:sec) 

Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 




Modbus format 

42921 hours 

42922 minutes 

42923 seconds 

168/80, 168/81, 

168/82 

UInt 

UInt 


11.6.5 Timer2 [650] 

Refer to the descriptions for Timer1. 

Timer 2 Trig [651] 

Default: 

Selection: 

651 Timer2 Trig 

Stp A 

Off 

Off 

Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu 

[541]. 





Modbus format 

Timer 2 T1 [654] 

43453 hours 

43454 minutes 

43455 seconds 

170/102, 170/103, 

170/104 

UInt 

UInt 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Default: 



Stp 0:00:00 

A 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 

Timer 2 Mode [652] 

652 Timer2 Mode 

Stp A 

Off 

Default: Off 





Modbus format 

43456 hours 

43457 minutes 

43458 seconds 

170/105, 170/106, 

170/107 

UInt 

UInt 


Timer 2 T2 [655] 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Timer 2 Delay [653] 

Default: 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 



Stp 0:00:00 

A 

Default: 

653 Timer2Delay 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 




Modbus format 

43459 hours 

43460 minutes 

43461 seconds 

170/108, 170/109, 

170/110 

UInt 

UInt 


Timer 2 Value [659] 

Timer 2 Value shows actual value of the timer. 

659 Timer2 Value 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 


Displays the actual shaft speed. 

712 Speed 

Stp 

rpm 

Default: 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 

Unit: 

Resolution: 

rpm 

1 rpm, 4 digits 





Modbus format 

11.7 View Operation/Status 

[700] 

Menu with parameters for viewing all actual operational 

data, such as speed, torque, power, etc. 

11.7.1 Operation [710] 

Process Value [711] 

The process value is a display function which can be programmed 

according to several quantities and units related to 

the reference value. 

Unit 

Resolution 


42924 hours 

42925 minutes 

42926 seconds 

168/83, 168/84, 

168/84 

UInt 

UInt 

711 Process Val 

Stp 

Depends on selected process source, 

[321]. 

Speed: 1 rpm, 4 digits 

Other units: 3 digits 




Modbus format 

EInt 





Modbus format 

Torque [713] 

Displays the actual shaft torque. 

Unit: 

Resolution: 

Nm 

1 Nm 



Shaft power [714] 

Displays the actual shaft power. 


Int, 1=1 rpm 

Int, 1=1 rpm 

31003 Nm 

31004% 



Modbus format 

Unit: 

Resolution: 

W 

1W 

EInt 



Fieldbus format Long, 1=1W 

Modbus format 

713 Torque 

Stp 0% 0.0Nm 

714 Shaft Power 

Stp 

EInt 

W 


Electrical Power [715] 

Displays the actual electrical output power. 

Frequency [718] 

Displays the actual output frequency. 

715 El Power 

Stp 

kW 

718 Frequency 

Stp 

Hz 

Unit: 

kW 

Unit: 

Hz 

Resolution: 

1 W 

Resolution: 

0.1 Hz 




Fieldbus format Long, 1=1W 

Modbus format 

EInt 





Long, 1=0.1 Hz 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Current [716] 

Displays the actual output current. 

DC Link Voltage [719] 

Displays the actual DC link voltage. 

716 Current 

Stp 

A 

719 DC Voltage 

Stp 

V 

Unit: 

A 

Unit: 

V 

Resolution: 

0.1 A 

Resolution: 

1 V 





Long, 1=0.1 A 

Modbus format 

EInt 





Long, 1=0.1 V 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Output Voltage [717] 

Displays the actual output voltage. 

717 Output Volt 

Stp 

V 

Heatsink Temperature [71A] 

Displays the actual heatsink temperature. 

71A Heatsink Tmp 

Stp °C 

Unit: 

Resolution: 

V 

1 V 

Unit: °C 

Resolution: 

0.1°C 





Long, 1=0.1 V 

Modbus format 

EInt 





Long, 1=0.1°C 

Modbus format 

EInt 


PT100_1_2_3 Temp [71B] 

Displays the actual PT100 temperature. 

Unit: °C 

Resolution: 1°C 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31012, 31013, 31014 



Modbus format 

71B PT100 1,2,3 

Stp °C 

Long 

EInt 

Warning [722] 

Display the actual or last warning condition. A warning 

occurs if the VSD is close to a trip condition but still in 

operation. During a warning condition the red trip LED 

will start to blink as long as the warning is active. 

722 Warnings 

Stp warn.msg 

The active warning message is displayed in menu [722]. 

If no warning is active the message “No Warning” is displayed. 

11.7.2 Status [720] 

VSD Status [721] 

Indicates the overall status of the variable speed drive. 

721 VSD Status 

Stp 1/222/333/44 

Fig. 113 VSD status 

Display 

position 

Status 

Value 

1 Parameter Set A,B,C,D 

222 

333 

Source of reference 

value 

Source of Run/ 

Stop/Reset command 

44 Limit functions 

Example: “A/Key/Rem/TL” 

This means: 

A: Parameter Set A is active. 

-Key (keyboard) 

-Rem (remote) 

-Com (Serial comm.) 

-Opt (option) 

-Key (keyboard) 

-Rem (remote) 

-Com (Serial comm.) 

-Opt (option) 

-TL (Torque Limit) 

-SL (Speed Limit) 

-CL (Current Limit) 

-VL (Voltage Limit) 

- - - -No limit active 

Key: Reference value comes from the keyboard (CP). 

Rem: Run/Stop commands come from terminals 1-22. 

TL: Torque Limit active. 


The following warnings are possible: 

Fieldbus 

integer 

value 

0 No Error 

1 Motor I²t 

2 PTC 

3 Motor lost 

4 Locked rotor 

5 Ext trip 

6 Mon MaxAlarm 

7 Mon MinAlarm 

8 Comm error 

9 PT100 

11 Pump 

12 Ext Mot Temp 

13 LC Level 

14 Not used 

15 Option 

16 Over temp 

17 Over curr F 

18 Over volt D 

19 Over volt G 

20 Over volt M 

21 Over speed 

22 Under voltage 

23 Power fault 

24 Desat 

25 DClink error 

26 Int error 

27 Ovolt m cut 

28 Over voltage 

29 Not used 

30 Not used 

31 Not used 


Warning message 




Modbus format 

Long 

UInt 

Digital Input Status [723] 

Indicates the status of the digital inputs. See Fig. 114. 

1 DigIn 1 

2 DigIn 2 

3 DigIn 3 

4 DigIn 4 

5 DigIn 5 

6 DigIn 6 

7 DigIn 7 

8 DigIn 8 

The positions one to eight (read from left to right) indicate 

the status of the associated input: 

1 High 

0 Low 

The example in Fig. 114 indicates that DigIn 1, 

DigIn 3 and DigIn 6 are active at this moment. 

723 DigIn Status 

Stp 1010 0100 

Fig. 114 Digital input status example 





Modbus format 

UInt, bit 0=DigIn1, bit 

8=DigIn8 

Digital Output Status [724] 

Indicates the status of the digital outputs and relays. See Fig. 

115. 

RE indicate the status of the relays on position: 

1 Relay1 

2 Relay2 

3 Relay3 

DO indicate the status of the digital outputs on position: 

1 DigOut1 

2 DigOut2 

The status of the associated output is shown. 

1 High 

0 Low 

See also the Chapter 12. page 151. 


The example in Fig. 115 indicates that DigOut1 is active 

and Digital Out 2 is not active. Relay 1 is active, relay 2 and 

3 are not active. 

724 DigOutStatus 

Stp RE 100 DO 10 

Fig. 115 Digital output status example 





Modbus format 

Analogue Input Status [725] 

Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 1 and 2. 

725 AnIn 1 2 

Stp -100% 65% 

Fig. 116 Analogue input status 


UInt, bit 0=DigOut1, 

bit 1=DigOut2 

bit 8=Relay1 

bit 9=Relay2 

bit 10=Relay3 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31019, 31020 

Profibus slot/index 121/163, 121/164 


Modbus format 

EInt 

The first row indicates the analogue inputs. 

1 AnIn 1 

2 AnIn 2 

Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the 

status of the belonging input is shown in %: 

-100% AnIn1 has a negative 100% input value 

65% AnIn2 has a 65% input value 

So the example in Fig. 116 indicates that both the Analogue 

inputs are active. 

NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute values 

based on the full range/scale of the in- our output; so 

related to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA. 

Analogue Input Status [726] 

Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 3 and 4. 

726 AnIn 3 4 

Stp -100% 65% 

Fig. 117 Analogue input status 





Modbus format 

Analogue Output Status [727] 

Indicates the status of the analogue outputs. Fig. 118. E.g. if 

4-20 mA output is used, the value 20% equals to 4 mA. 

727 AnOut 1 2 

Stp -100% 65% 

Fig. 118 Analogue output status 


EInt 




Modbus format 

EInt 

The first row indicates the Analogue outputs. 

1 AnOut 1 

2 AnOut 2 

Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the 

status of the belonging output is shown in %: 

-100%AnOut1 has a negative 100% output value 

65%AnOut2 has a 65% output value 

The example in Fig. 118 indicates that both the Analogue 

outputs are active. 

NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute values 

based on the full range/scale of the in- our output; so 

related to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA. 


I/O board Status [728] - [72A] 

Indicates the status for the additional I/O on option boards 

1 (B1), 2 (B2) and 3 (B3). 

728 IO B1 

Stp RE000 DI10 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31025 - 31027 

Profibus slot/index 121/170 - 172 


Modbus format 

11.7.3 Stored values [730] 

The shown values are the actual values built up over time. 

Values are stored at power down and updated again at power 

up. 

Run Time [731] 

Displays the total time that the VSD has been in the Run 

Mode. 

Unit: 

Range: 


UInt, bit 0=DigIn1 

bit 1=DigIn2 

bit 2=DigIn3 

bit 8=Relay1 

bit 9=Relay2 

bit 10=Relay3 

h: m: s (hours: minutes: seconds) 

0h: 0m: 0s–65535h: 59m: 59s 




Modbus format 

731 Run Time 

Stp 

h:m:s 

31028 hours 

31029 minutes 

31030 seconds 

121/172 

121/173 

121/174 

UInt, 1=1h/m/s 


Reset Run Time [7311] 

Reset the run time counter. The stored information will be 

erased and a new registration period will start. 

Default: 

No 0 

Yes 1 

No 





Modbus format 

Mains time [732] 

Displays the total time that the VSD has been connected to 

the mains supply. This timer cannot be reset. 


UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: After reset the setting automatically reverts to 

“No”. 

Unit: 

Range: 

h: m: s (hours: minutes: seconds) 

0h: 0m: 0s–65535h: 59m: 59s 




Modbus format 

7311 Reset RunTm 

Stp 

No 

732 Mains Time 

Stp 

h:m:s 

31031 hours 

31032 minutes 

31033 seconds 

121/175 

121/176 

121/177 



NOTE: At 65535 h: 59 m the counter stops. It will not 

revert to 0h: 0m. 


Energy [733] 

Displays the total energy consumption since the last energy 

reset [7331] took place. 

Unit: 

Range: 

kWh 

0.0–999999kWh 





Modbus format 

Reset Energy [7331] 

Resets the kWh counter. The stored information will be 

erased and a new registration period will start. 

Default: 

Selection: 

No 

No, Yes 



Long, 1=1 W 

EInt 



Modbus format 

733 Energy 

Stp 

UInt 

UInt 

kWh 

7331 Rst Energy 

Stp 

No 

NOTE: After reset the setting automatically goes back to 

“No”. 

11.8 View Trip Log [800] 

Main menu with parameters for viewing all the logged trip 

data. In total the VSD saves the last 10 trips in the trip 

memory. The trip memory refreshes on the FIFO principle 

(First In, First Out). Every trip in the memory is logged on 

the time of the Run Time [731] counter. At every trip, the 

actual values of several parameter are stored and available for 

troubleshooting. 

11.8.1 Trip Message log [810] 

Display the cause of the trip and what time that it occurred. 

When a trip occurs the status menus are copied to the trip 

message log. There are nine trip message logs [810]–[890]. 

When the tenth trip occurs the oldest trip will disappear. 

Unit: 

Range: 

h: m (hours: minutes) 

0h: 0m–65355h: 59m 

For fieldbus integer value of trip message, see message table 

for warnings, [722]. 

NOTE: Bits 0–5 used for trip message value. Bits 6–15 

for internal use. 





Modbus format 

8x0 Trip message 

Stp h:mm:ss 

810 Ext Trip 

Stp 132:12:14 

UInt 

UInt 

Trip message [811]-[81N] 

The information from the status menus are copied to the 

trip message log when a trip occurs. 

Trip menu Copied from Description 

811 711 Process Value 

812 712 Speed 

813 712 Torque 

814 714 Shaft Power 

815 715 Electrical Power 

816 716 Current 

817 717 Output voltage 

818 718 Frequency 

819 719 DC Link voltage 

81A 71A Heatsink Temperature 

81B 71B PT100_1, 2, 3 

81C 721 VSD Status 

81D 723 Digital input status 

81E 724 Digital output status 


Trip menu Copied from Description 

81F 725 Analogue input status 1-2 

81G 726 Analogue input status 3-4 

81H 727 Analogue output status 1-2 

81I 728 I/O status option board 1 

81J 729 I/O status option board 2 

81K 72A I/O status option board 3 

81L 731 Run Time 

81M 732 Mains Time 

81N 733 Energy 

81O 310 Process reference 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31102 - 31135 



Modbus format 

Example: 

Fig. 119 shows the third trip memory menu [830]: Over 

temperature trip occurred after 1396 hours and 13 minutes 

in Run time. 

Fig. 119 Trip 3 

121/246 - 254, 

122/0 - 24 

Depends on parameter, 

see respective parameter. 

Depends on parameter, 

see respective parameter. 

830 Over temp 

Stp 1396h:13m 

11.8.2 Trip Messages [820] - [890] 

Same information as for menu [810]. 



DeviceNet no: 



Modbus format 

31151–31185 

31201–31235 

31251–31285 

31301–31335 

31351–31385 

31401–31435 

31451–31485 

31501–31535 

122/40–122/74 

122/90–122/124 

122/140–122/174 

122/190–122/224 

122/240–123/18 

123/35 - 123/68 

123/85–123/118 

123/135–123/168 

Trip log list 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Trip log list 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Depends on parameter, see respective 

parameter. 

Depends on parameter, see respective 

parameter. 

All nine alarm lists contain the same type of data. For example 

DeviceNet parameter 31101 in alarm list 1 contains the 

same data information as 31151 in alarm list 2. It is possible 

to read all parameters in alarm lists 2–9 by recalculating the 

DeviceNet instance number into a Profibus slot/index 

number. This is done in the following way: 

slot no = abs((dev instance no-1)/255) 

index no = (dev instance no-1) modulo 255 

dev instance no = slot nox255+index no+1 

Example: We want to read out the process value out from 

alarm list 9. In alarm list 1 process value has the DeviceNet 

instance number 31102. In alarm list 9 it has DeviceNet 

instance no 31502 (see table 2 above). The corresponding 

slot/index no is then: 

slot no = abs((31502-1)/255)=123 

index no (modulo)= the remainder of the division above = 

136, calculated as: (31502-1)-123x255=136 


11.8.3 Reset Trip Log [8A0] 

Resets the content of the 10 trip memories. 

Default: 

No 0 

Yes 1 

No 





Modbus format 

8A0 Reset Trip 

Stp 

11.9 System Data [900] 

Main menu for viewing all the VSD system data. 

11.9.1 VSD Data [920] 

UInt 

UInt 

VSD Type [921] 

Shows the VSD type according to the type number. 

No 

NOTE: After the reset the setting goes automatically 

back to “NO”. The message “OK” is displayed for 2 sec. 

The options are indicated on the type plate of the VSD. 

NOTE: If the control board is not configured, then type 

type shown is FDU40-XXX. 

Software [922] 

Shows the software version number of the VSD. 

Fig. 120 gives an example of the version number. 

922 Software 

Stp V 4.20 

Fig. 120 Example of software version 



31038 software version 

31039 option version 

Profibus slot/index 121/182-183 


Modbus format 

Table 28 

Bit 

UInt 

UInt 

Information for Modbus and Profibus number, 

software version 

7–0 minor 

13–8 major 

15–14 

Table 29 

Bit 

Description 

release 

00: V, release version 

01: P, pre-release version 

10: β, Beta version 

11: α, Alpha version 

Information for Modbus and Profibus number, 

option version 

7–0 minor 

15–8 major 

Description 

921 FDU2.0 

Stp FDU48-046 

Example of type 





Modbus format 

Long 

Text 

V 4.20 = Version of the Software 

NOTE: It is important that the software version displayed 

in menu [920] is the same software version number as 

the software version number written on the title page of 

this instruction manual. If not, the functionality as 

described in this manual may differ from the 

functionality of the VSD. 

Examples: 

FDU48-046VSD-series suited for 380-480 volt mains supply, 

and a rated output current of 46 A. 


Unit name [923] 

Option to enter a name of the unit for service use or customer 

identity. The function enables the user to define a 

name with 12 symbols. Use the Prev and Next key to move 

the cursor to the required position. Then use the + and - 

keys to scroll in the character list. Confirm the character by 

moving the cursor to the next position by pressing the Next 

key. See section User-defined Unit [323]. 

Example 

Create user name USER 15. 

1. When in the menu [923] press Next to move the cursor 

to the right most position. 

2. Press the + key until the character U is displayed. 

3. Press Next. 

4. Then press the + key until S is displayed and confirm 

with Next. 

5. Repeat until you have entered USER15. 

923 Unit Name 

Stp 

Default: 

No characters shown 



Profibus slot/index 165/225–236 


Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

When sending a unit name you send one character at a time 

starting at the right most position. 


12. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 

12.1 Trips, warnings and limits 

In order to protect the variable speed drive the principal 

operating variables are continuously monitored by the system. 

If one of these variables exceeds the safety limit an 

error/warning message is displayed. In order to avoid any 

possibly dangerous situations, the inverter sets itself into a 

stop Mode called Trip and the cause of the trip is shown in 

the display. 

Trips will always stop the VSD. Trips can be divided into 

normal and soft trips, depending on the setup Trip Type, see 

menu [250] Autoreset. Normal trips are default. For normal 

trips the VSD stops immediately, i.e. the motor coasts naturally 

to a standstill. For soft trips the VSD stops by ramping 

down the speed, i.e. the motor decelerates to a standstill. 

“Normal Trip” 

• The VSD stops immediately, the motor coasts to naturally 

to a standstill. 

• The Trip relay or output is active (if selected). 

• The Trip LED is on. 

• The accompanying trip message is displayed. 

• The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of the 

display). 

“Soft Trip” 

• the VSD stops by decelerating to a standstill. 

During the deceleration. 

• The accompanying trip message is displayed, including 

an additional soft trip indicator “S” before the trip time. 

• The Trip LED is blinking. 

• The Warning relay or output is active (if selected). 

After standstill is reached. 

• The Trip LED is on. 

• The Trip relay or output is active (if selected). 

• The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of the 

display). 

Apart from the TRIP indicators there are two more indicators 

to show that the inverter is in an “abnormal” situation. 

“Warning” 

• The inverter is close to a trip limit. 

• The Warning relay or output is active (if selected). 


• The accompanying warning message is displayed in window 

[722] Warning. 

• One of the warning indications is displayed (area F of 

the display). 

“Limits” 

• The inverter is limiting torque and/or frequency to avoid 

a trip. 

• The Limit relay or output is active (if selected). 


• One of the Limit status indications is displayed (area D 

of the display). 

Table 30 

Trip/Warning 

messages 

List of trips and warnings 

Selections 

Trip 

(Normal/ 

Soft) 

Motor I 2 t Trip/Off/Limit Normal/Soft I 2 t 

PTC Trip/Off Normal/Soft 

Motor lost Trip/Off Normal 

Locked rotor Trip/Off Normal 

Ext trip Via DigIn Normal/Soft 

Ext Mot Temp Via DigIn Normal/Soft 

Mon MaxAlarm Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft 

Mon MinAlarm Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft 

Comm error Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft 

PT100 Trip/Off Normal/Soft 

Deviation Via Option Normal 

Pump Via Option Normal 

Over temp On Normal OT 

Over curr F On Normal 

Over volt D On Normal 

Over volt G On Normal 

Over volt On Normal 

Over speed On Normal 

Under voltage On Normal LV 

Power Fault On Normal 

Desat On Normal 

DClink error On Normal 

Ovolt m cut On Normal 

Over voltage Warning VL 

Safe stop Warning SST 

Motor PTC On Normal 

LC Level 

Trip/Off/Warn 

Via DigIn 

Normal/Soft 

Warning 

indicators 

(Area D) 

LCL 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 151

12.2 Trip conditions, causes and 

remedial action 

The table later on in this section must be seen as a basic aid 

to find the cause of a system failure and to how to solve any 

problems that arise. A variable speed drive is mostly just a 

small part of a complete VSD system. Sometimes it is difficult 

to determine the cause of the failure, although the variable 

speed drive gives a certain trip message it is not always 

easy to find the right cause of the failure. Good knowledge 

of the complete drive system is therefore necessary. Contact 

your supplier if you have any questions. 

The VSD is designed in such a way that it tries to avoid trips 

by limiting torque, overvolt etc. 

Failures occurring during commissioning or shortly after 

commissioning are most likely to be caused by incorrect settings 

or even bad connections. 

Failures or problems occurring after a reasonable period of 

failure-free operation can be caused by changes in the system 

or in its environment (e.g. wear). 

Failures that occur regularly for no obvious reasons are generally 

caused by Electro Magnetic Interference. Be sure that 

the installation fulfils the demands for installation stipulated 

in the EMC directives. See chapter 8. page 49. 

Sometimes the so-called “Trial and error” method is a 

quicker way to determine the cause of the failure. This can 

be done at any level, from changing settings and functions to 

disconnecting single control cables or replacing entire drives. 

The Trip Log can be useful for determining whether certain 

trips occur at certain moments. The Trip Log also records 

the time of the trip in relation to the run time counter. 

WARNING: If it is necessary to open the VSD 

or any part of the system (motor cable 

housing, conduits, electrical panels, 

cabinets, etc.) to inspect or take measurements 

as suggested in this instruction manual, it is 

absolutely necessary to read and follow the safety 

instructions in the manual. 

12.2.1 Technically qualified personnel 

Installation, commissioning, demounting, making measurements, 

etc., of or at the variable speed drive may only be carried 

out by personnel technically qualified for the task. 

12.2.2 Opening the variable speed 

drive 

WARNING: Always switch the mains voltage 

off if it is necessary to open the VSD and wait 

at least 5 minutes to allow the capacitors to 

discharge. 

WARNING: In case of malfunctioning always 

check the DC-link voltage, or wait one hour 

after the mains voltage has been switched 

off, before dismantling the VSD for repair. 

The connections for the control signals and the switches are 

isolated from the mains voltage. Always take adequate precautions 

before opening the variable speed drive. 

12.2.3 Precautions to take with a 

connected motor 

If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the 

driven machine, the mains voltage must always first be disconnected 

from the variable speed drive. Wait at least 5 minutes 

before continuing. 

12.2.4 Autoreset Trip 

If the maximum number of Trips during Autoreset has been 

reached, the trip message hour counter is marked with an 

“A”. 

830 OVERVOLT G 

Trp A 345:45:12 

Fig. 121 Autoreset trip 

Fig. 121 shows the 3rd trip memory menu [830]: Overvoltage 

G trip after the maximum Autoreset attempts took place 

after 345 hours, 45 minutes and 12 seconds of run time. 

152 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

Table 31 

Trip condition, their possible causes and remedial action 

Trip condition Possible Cause Remedy 

Motor I 2 t 

“I 2 t” 

PTC 

Motor PTC 

Motor lost 

Locked rotor 

Ext trip 

Ext Mot Temp 

Mon MaxAlarm 

Mon MinAlarm 

Comm error 

PT100 

I 2 t value is exceeded. 

- Overload on the motor according to the 

programmed I 2 t settings. 

Motor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximum 

level. 

NOTE: Only valid if option board PTC/PT100 

is used. 

Motor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximum 

level. 

NOTE: Only valid if [237] is enabled. 

Phase loss or too great imbalance on the 

motor phases 

Torque limit at motor standstill: 

- Mechanical blocking of the rotor. 

External input (DigIn 1-8) active: 

- active low function on the input. 



Max alarm level (overload) has been 

reached. 

Min alarm level (underload) has been 

reached. 

Error on serial communication (option) 

Motor PT100 elements exceeds maximum 

level. 

NOTE: Only valid if option board PTC/PT100 

is used. 

- Check on mechanical overload on the 

motor or the machinery (bearings, 

gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.) 

- Change the Motor I 2 t Current setting 




- Check the motor cooling system. 

- Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high 

load. 

- Set PTC, menu [234] to OFF 






load. 

- Set PTC, menu [237] to OFF 

- Check the motor voltage on all phases. 

- Check for loose or poor motor cable 

connections 

- If all connections are OK, contact your 

supplier 

- Set motor lost alarm to OFF. 

- Check for mechanical problems at the 

motor or the machinery connected to the 

motor 

- Set locked rotor alarm to OFF. 

- Check the equipment that initiates the 

external input 

- Check the programming of the digital 

inputs DigIn 1-8 

- Check the equipment that initiates the 


- Check the programming of the digital 

inputs DigIn 1-8 

- Check the load condition of the machine 

- Check the monitor setting in section 11.6, page 131. 

- Check the load condition of the machine 

- Check the monitor setting in section 11.6, page 131. 

- Check cables and connection of the 

serial communication. 

- Check all settings with regard to the 

serial communication 

- Restart the equipment including the 

VSD 






load. 

- Set PT100 to OFF 


Table 31 



Pump 

Over temp 

Over curr F 

Over volt D(eceleration) 

Over volt G(enerator) 

Over volt (Mains) 

O(ver) volt M(ains) cut 

Over speed 

Under voltage 

Power Fault 

Desat 

No master pump can be selected due to error 

in feedback signalling. 

NOTE: Only used in Pump Control. 

Heatsink temperature too high: 

- Too high ambient temperature of the 

VSD 

- Insufficient cooling 

- Too high current 

- Blocked or stuffed fans 

Motor current exceeds the peak VSD current: 

- Too short acceleration time. 

- Too high motor load 

- Excessive load change 

- Soft short-circuit between phases or 

phase to earth 

- Poor or loose motor cable connections 

- Too high IxR Compensation level 

Too high DC Link voltage: 

- Too short deceleration time with 

respect to motor/machine inertia. 

- Too small brake resistor malfunctioning 

Brake chopper 

Too high DC Link voltage, due to too high 

mains voltage 

Motor speed measurement exceeds maximum 

level. 

Too low DC Link voltage: 

- Too low or no supply voltage 

- Mains voltage dip due to starting other 

major power consuming machines on 

the same line. 

Overload condition in the DC-link: 

- Hard short-circuit between phases or 

phase to earth 

- Saturation of current measurement 

circuiting 

- Earth fault 

- Desaturation of IGBTs 

- Peak voltage on DC link 

- Check cables and wiring for Pump feedback signals 

- Check settings with regard to the pump feedback 

digital inputs 

- Check the cooling of the VSD cabinet. 

- Check the functionality of the built-in fans. The fans 

must switch on automatically if the heatsink temperature 

gets too high. At power up the fans are briefly 

switched on. 

- Check VSD and motor rating 

- Clean fans 

- Check the acceleration time settings and 

make them longer if necessary. 

- Check the motor load. 

- Check on bad motor cable connections 

- Check on bad earth cable connection 

- Check on water or moisture in the motor housing and 

cable connections. 

- Lower the level of IxR Compensation [352] 

- Check the deceleration time settings and make them 

longer if necessary. 

- Check the dimensions of the brake resistor and the 

functionality of the Brake chopper (if used) 

- Check the main supply voltage 

- Try to take away the interference cause or use other 

main supply lines. 

Check encoder cables, wiring and setup 

Check motor data setup [22x] 

Perform short ID-run 

- Make sure all three phases are properly connected 

and that the terminal screws are tightened. 

- Check that the mains supply voltage is within the limits 

of the VSD. 

- Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused by 

other machinery 

- Use the function low voltage override [421] 


- Check on bad earth cable connection 

- Check on water or moisture in the motor housing and 

cable connections 

- Check that rating plate data of the motor is correctly 

entered 

- See overvoltage trips 

Power Fault Error on power board. - Check mains supply voltage 

Fan Error 

Error in fan module 

- Check for clogged air inlet filters in panel door and 

blocking material in fan module. 

HCB Error * Error in controlled rectifier module (HCB) - Check mains supply voltage 


Table 31 



Desat 

Desat U+ * 

Desat U- * 

Desat V+ * 

Desat V- * 

Desat W+ * 

Desat W- * 

Desat BCC * 

DC link error 

PF Curr Err * 

PF Overvolt * 

Failure in output stage, 

desaturation of IGBTs 

DC link voltage ripple exceeds maximum 

level 

Error in current balancing 

Error in voltage balancing 

PF Comm Err * Internal communication error Contact service 


- Check on bad earth cable connections 

- Check on water and moisture in the 

motor housing and cable connections 

- Make sure all three phases are properly 

connected and that the terminal screws are tightened. 

- Check that the mains supply voltage is within the limits 

of the VSD. 

- Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused by 

other machinery. 

- Check motor. 

- Check fuses and line connections 

- Check motor. 

- Check fuses and line connections. 

PF Int Temp * Internal temperature too high Check internal fans 

PF Temp Err * Malfunction in temperature sensor Contact service 

PF DC Err * 

PF HCB Err * 

PF Sup Err * 

LC Level 

DC-link error and mains supply fault 

Error in controlled rectifier module (HCB) 

Mains supply fault 

Low liquid cooling level in external reservoir. 



NOTE: Only valid for VSD types with Liquid 

Cooling option. 

- Check mains supply voltage 


- Check mains supply voltage 


- Check liquid cooling 

- Check the equipment and wiring that initiates the 


- Check the programming of the digital inputs DigIn 1-8 

* = 2...6 Module number if parallel power units (size 300– 

1500 A) 

12.3 Maintenance 

The variable speed drive is designed not to require any servicing 

or maintenance. There are however some things which 

must be checked regularly. 

All variable speed drives have built-in fan which is speed 

controlled using heatsink temperature feedback. This means 

that the fans are only running if the VSD is running and 

loaded. The design of the heatsinks is such that the fan does 

not blow the cooling air through the interior of the VSD, 

but only across the outer surface of the heatsink. However, 

running fans will always attract dust. Depending on the 

environment the fan and the heatsink will collect dust. 

Check this and clean the heatsink and the fans when necessary. 

If variable speed drives are built into cabinets, also check and 

clean the dust filters of the cabinets regularly. 

Check external wiring, connections and control signals. 

Tighten terminal screws if necessary. 



13. Options 

The standard options available are described here briefly. 

Some of the options have their own instruction or installation 

manual. For more information please contact your supplier. 

13.1 Options for the control 

panel 

Order number 

Description 

01-3957-00 Panel kit complete including panel 

01-3957-01 Panel kit complete including blank panel 

Mounting cassette, blank panel and straight RS232-cable are 

available as options for the control panel. These options may 

be useful, for example after mounting a control panel in a 

cabinet door. 

13.3 Brake chopper 

All VSD sizes can be fitted with an optional built-in brake 

chopper. The brake resistor must be mounted outside the 

VSD. The choice of the resistor depends on the application 

switch-on duration and duty-cycle. This option can not be 

after mounted. 

The following formula can be used to define the power of 

the connected brake resistor: 

P resistor = 

WARNING: The table gives the minimum 

values of the brake resistors. Do not use 

resistors lower than this value. The VSD can 

trip or even be damaged due to high braking 

currents. 

(Brake level V DC ) 2 

R min 

x ED% 

Where: 

P resistor 

required power of brake 

resistor 

Brake level V DC DC brake voltage level (see Table 33 

and Table 34) 

Rmin 

minimum allowable brake resistor 

(see Table 33 and Table 34+1 

ED% 

effective braking period. Defined as: 

ED% = 

Active brake time at 

nominal braking 

power [s] 

120 [s] 

Maximum value of 

1= continuous braking 

Table 32 

Fig. 122 Control panel in mounting cassette 

13.2 EmoSoftCom 

EmoSoftCom is an optional software that runs on a personal 

computer. It can also be used to load parameter settings 

from the VSD to the PC for backup and printing. Recording 

can be made in oscilloscope mode. Please contact Emotron 

sales for further information. 

Supply voltage (V AC ) 

(set in menu [21B] 

220–240 380 

380–415 660 

440–480 780 

500–525 860 

550–600 1000 

660–690 1150 

Brake level (V DC ) 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Options 157

Table 33 

Brake resistor FDU40/48 type 

Table 34 

Brake resistors FDU50/52 V types 

Type 

Rmin [ohm] if supply 

380–415 V AC 


440–480 V AC 

Type 


440–480 V AC 


500–525 V AC 

FDU48-003 43 50 

-004 43 50 

-006 43 50 

-008 43 50 

-010 43 50 

-013 43 50 

-018 43 50 

-026 26 30 

-031 26 30 

-037 17 20 

-046 17 20 

FDU40-060 9.7 N.A. 

-073 9.7 N.A 

FDU48-090 3.8 4.4 

Table 34 

Type 

-109 3.8 4.4 

-146 3.8 4.4 

-175 3.8 4.4 

-210 2.7 3.1 

-250 2.7 3.1 

-300 2 x 3.8 2 x 4.4 

-375 2 x 3.8 2 x 4.4 

-430 2 x 2.7 2 x 3.1 

-500 2 x 2.7 2 x 3.1 

-600 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1 

-650 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1 

-750 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1 

-860 4 x 2.7 4 x 3.1 

-1000 4 x 2.7 4 x 3.1 

-1200 6 x 2.7 6 x 3.1 

-1500 6 x 2.7 6 x 3.1 

Brake resistors FDU50/52 V types 


440–480 V AC 


500–525 V AC 


-004 50 55 

-006 50 55 

-008 50 55 

-010 50 55 

-013 50 55 

-018 50 55 

-026 30 32 

-031 30 32 

-037 20 22 

-046 20 22 


Table 35 

Type 

Brake resistors FDU69 V types 

Rmin [ohm] Rmin [ohm] Rmin [ohm] 

500–525 V AC 550–600 V AC 660–690 V AC 

if supply if supply if supply 

FDU69-090 4.9 5.7 6.5 

-109 4.9 5.7 6.5 

-146 4.9 5.7 6.5 

-175 4.9 5.7 6.5 

-210 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5 

-250 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5 

-300 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5 

-375 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5 

-430 3 x 4.9 3 x 5.7 3 x 6.5 

-500 3 x 4.9 3 x 5.7 3 x 6.5 

-600 4 x 4.9 4 x 5.7 4 x 6.5 

-650 4 x 4.9 4 x 5.7 4 x 6.5 

-750 6 x 4.9 6 x 5.7 6 x 6.5 

-860 6 x 4.9 6 x 5.7 6 x 6.5 

-900 6 x 4.9 6 x 5.7 6 x 6.5 

-1000 6 x 4.9 6 x 5.7 6 x 6.5 

NOTE: Although the VSD will detect a failure in the brake 

electronics, the use of resistors with a thermal overload 

which will cut off the power at overload is strongly 

recommended. 

The brake chopper option is built-in by the manufacturer 

and must be specified when the VSD is ordered. 

158 Options Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

13.4 I/O Board 

Order number 

Description 

01-3876-01 I/O option board 2.0 

The I/O option board 2.0 provides three extra relay outputs 

and three extra digital inputs. The I/O Board works in combination 

with the Pump/Fan Control, but can also be used 

as a separate option. This option is described in a separate 

manual. 

Must be 

double 

isolated 

X1 

~ 

X1:1 Left terminal 

X1:2 Right terminal 

13.5 Output coils 

Output coils, which are supplied separately, are recommended 

for lengths of screened motor cable longer than 100 

m. Because of the fast switching of the motor voltage and 

the capacitance of the motor cable both line to line and line 

to earth screen, large switching currents can be generated 

with long lengths of motor cable. Output coils prevent the 

VSD from tripping and should be installed as closely as possible 

to the VSD. 

13.6 Serial communication 

and fieldbus 

Order number 

01-3876-04 RS232/485 

01-3876-05 Profibus DP 

01-3876-06 DeviceNet 

Description 

01-3876-09 Modbus/TCP, Ethernet 

For communication with the VSD there are several option 

boards for communication. There are different options for 

Fieldbus communication and one serial communication 

option with RS232 or RS485 interface which has galvanic 

isolation. 

13.7 Standby supply board 

option 

Order number 

Description 

01-3954-00 Standby power supply kit for after mounting 

The standby supply board option provides the possibility of 

keeping the communication system up and running without 

having the 3-phase mains connected. One advantage is that 

the system can be set up without mains power. The option 

will also give backup for communication failure if main 

power is lost. 

The standby supply board option is supplied with external 

±10% 24 V DC or 24 V AC, protected by a 2 A slow acting 

fuse, from a double isolated transformer. The terminals X1:1 

and X1:2 are voltage polarity independent. 

Fig. 123 Connection of standby supply option 

Table 36 

X1 

terminal 

1 Ext. supply 1 

2 Ext. supply 2 

Name Function Specification 

External, VSD main 

power independent, 

supply voltage 

for control and communication 

circuits 

24 V DC or 24 

V AC ±10% 

Double isolated 

13.8 Safe Stop option 

To realize a Safe Stop configuration in accordance with 

EN-IEC 62061:2005 SIL 2 & EN-ISO 13849-1:2006, the 

following three parts need to be attended to: 

1. Inhibit trigger signals with safety relay K1 (via Safe Stop 

option board). 

2. Enable input and control of VSD (via normal I/O control 

signals of VSD). 

3. Power conductor stage (checking status and feedback of 

driver circuits and IGBT’s). 

To enable the VSD to operate and run the motor, the following 

signals should be active: 

• "Inhibit" input, terminals 1 (DC+) and 2 (DC-) on the 

Safe Stop option board should be made active by connecting 

24 V DC to secure the supply voltage for the 

driver circuits of the power conductors via safety relay 

K1. See also Fig. 126. 

• High signal on the digital input, e.g. terminal 10 in Fig. 

126, which is set to "Enable". For setting the digital 

input please refer to section 11.5.2, page 122. 

These two signals need to be combined and used to enable 

the output of the VSD and make it possible to activate a 

Safe Stop condition. 

NOTE: The "Safe Stop" condition according to EN-IEC 

62061:2005 SIL 2 & EN-ISO 13849-1:2006, can only be 

realized by de-activating both the "Inhibit" and "Enable" 

inputs. 


When the "Safe Stop" condition is achieved by using these 

two different methods, which are independently controlled, 

this safety circuit ensures that the motor will not start running 

because: 

• The 24V DC signal is taken away from the "Inhibit" 

input, terminals 1 and 2, the safety relay K1 is switched 

off. 

The supply voltage to the driver circuits of the power 

conductors is switched off. This will inhibit the trigger 

pulses to the power conductors. 

• The trigger pulses from the control board are shut down. 

The Enable signal is monitored by the controller circuit 

which will forward the information to the PWM part on 

the Control board. 

To make sure that the safety relay K1 has been switched off, 

this should be guarded externally to ensure that this relay did 

not refuse to act. The Safe Stop option board offers a feedback 

signal for this via a second forced switched safety relay 

K2 which is switched on when a detection circuit has confirmed 

that the supply voltage to the driver circuits is shut 

down. See Table 37 for the contacts connections. 

To monitor the "Enable" function, the selection "RUN" on 

a digital output can be used. For setting a digital output, e.g. 

terminal 20 in the example Fig. 126, please refer to section 

11.5.4, page 127 [540]. 

When the "Inhibit" input is de-activated, the VSD display 

will show a blinking "SST" indication in section D (bottom 

left corner) and the red Trip LED on the Control panel will 

blink. 

To resume normal operation, the following steps have to be 

taken: 

• Release "Inhibit" input; 24V DC (High) to terminal 1 

and 2. 

• Give a STOP signal to the VSD, according to the set 

Run/Stop Control in menu [215]. 

• Give a new Run command, according to the set Run/ 

Stop Control in menu [215]. 

Fig. 124 Connection of safe stop option in size B and C. 

Fig. 125 Connection of safe stop option in size E and up. 

1 

2 3 4 5 

6 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

NOTE: The method of generating a STOP command is 

dependent on the selections made in Start Signal Level/ 

Edge [21A] and the use of a separate Stop input via 

digital input. 

Table 37 

X1 

pin 

Specification of Safe Stop option board 

Name Function Specification 

WARNING: The safe stop function can never 

be used for electrical maintenance. For 

electrical maintenance the VSD should 

always be disconnected from the supply 

voltage. 

1 Inhibit + Inhibit driver circuits of 

2 Inhibit - power conductors 

3 

4 

NO contact 

relay K2 

P contact 

relay K2 

Feedback; confirmation 

of activated inhibit 

5 GND Supply ground 

6 +24 VDC 

Supply Voltage for operating 

Inhibit input only. 

DC 24 V 

(20–30 V) 

48 V DC / 

30 V AC /2 A 

+24 V DC , 

50 mA 


Safe Stop 

+5V 

Power board 

= 

X1 

1 

2 

K1 

3 

4 

K2 

= 

U 

5 

6 

+24 V DC 

~ 

V 

W 

X1 

Enable 

10 

DigIn 

Controller 

PWM 

Stop 

20 

DigOut 

Fig. 126 

13.9 Encoder 

Order number 

Description 

01-3876-03 Encoder 2.0 option board 

The Encoder 2.0 option board, used for connection of feedback 

signal of the actual motor speed via an incremental 

encoder is described in a separate manual. 

13.10 PTC/PT100 

Order number 

Description 

01-3876-08 PTC/PT100 2.0 option board 

The PTC/PT100 2.0 option board for connecting motor 

thermistors to the VSD is described in a separate manual. 



14. Technical Data 

14.1 Electrical specifications 

related to model 

Table 38 

Typical motor power at mains voltage 400 V 

Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 


Power @400V 

[kW] 

Rated current 

[A] 

Heavy duty 


Power @400V 

[kW] 

Rated current 

[A] 

Frame size 

FDU48-003 3.0 0.75 2.5 0.55 2.0 

FDU48-004 4.8 1.5 4.0 1.1 3.2 


FDU48-008 9.0 3 7.5 2.2 6.0 

FDU48-010 11.4 4 9.5 3 7.6 

FDU48-013 15.6 5.5 13.0 4 10.4 


FDU48-026 31 11 26 7.5 21 

FDU48-031 37 15 31 11 25 

FDU48-037 44 18.5 37 15 29.6 

FDU48-046 55 22 46 18.5 37 




















B 

C 

X2 

E 

F 

G 

H 

I 

J 

K 

* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature. 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Technical Data 163

Table 39 


Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 


Power @460V 

[hp] 

Rated current 

[A] 

Heavy duty 


Power @460V 

[hp] 

Rated current 

[A] 

Frame size 

FDU48-003 3.0 1 2.5 1 2.0 




B 






FDU48-037 46 25 37 20 29.6 

C 


FDU50-060 73 40 61 30 49 X2 




E 




F 



G 



H 



I 




J 



K 


164 Technical Data Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

Table 40 


Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 


Power @525V 

[kW] 

Rated current 

[A] 

Heavy duty 


Power @525V 

[kW] 

Rated current 

[A] 

Frame size 

FDU52-003 3.0 1.1 2.5 1.1 2.0 




B 





FDU52-031 37 18.5 31 15 25 

FDU52-037 44 22 37 18.5 29.6 

C 


FDU50-060 73 37 61 30 49 X2 




F69 





H69 




I69 



J69 



K69 




Table 41 


Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 


Heavy duty 


Power @575V [hp] Rated current [A] Power @575V [hp] Rated current [A] 

Frame size 
















F69 

H69 

I69 

J69 

K69 


Table 42 


Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 


Heavy duty 


Power @690V [kW] Rated current [A] Power @690V [kW] Rated current [A] 

Frame size 

















F69 

H69 

I69 

J69 

K69 



14.2 General electrical specifications 

Table 43 

General electrical specifications 

General 

Mains voltage: FDU40 

FDU48 

FDU50/52 

FDU69 

Mains frequency: 

Input power factor: 

Output voltage: 

Output frequency: 

Output switching frequency: 

Efficiency at nominal load: 

Control signal inputs: 

Analogue (differential) 

Analogue Voltage/current: 

Max. input voltage: 

Input impedance: 

Resolution: 

Hardware accuracy: 

Non-linearity 

Digital: 

Input voltage: 

Max. input voltage: 

Input impedance: 

Signal delay: 

Control signal outputs 

Analogue 

Output voltage/current: 

Max. output voltage: 

Short-circuit current (∞): 

Output impedance: 

Resolution: 

Maximum load impedance for current 

Hardware accuracy: 

Offset: 

Non-linearity: 

Digital 

Output voltage: 

Shortcircuit current(∞): 

Relays 

Contacts 

References 

+10VDC 

-10VDC 

+24VDC 

230-415V +10%/-15% (-10% at 230 V) 

230-480V +10%/-15% (-10% at 230 V) 

440-525V +10%/-15% 

500-690V +10%/-15% 

45 to 65 Hz 

0.95 

0–Mains supply voltage: 

0–400 Hz 

3 kHz (adjustable 1,5-6 kHz) 

97% for models 003 to 018 


97.5% for models 060 to 073 


0-±10 V/0-20 mA via switch 

+30 V/30 mA 

20 kΩ (voltage) 

250 Ω (current) 

11 bits + sign 

1% type + 1 ½ LSB fsd 

1½ LSB 

High: >9 VDC, Low: 23 VDC open 

Low:

14.3 Operation at higher 

temperatures 

Most Emotron variable speed drives are made for operation 

at maximum of 40°C ambient temperature. However, for 

most models, it is possible to use the VSD at higher temperatures 

with little loss in performance. Table 44 shows ambient 

temperatures as well as derating for higher temperatures. 

Table 44 

Ambient temperature and derating 400–690 V types 

Model 

IP20 

IP54 

Max temp. Derating: possible Max temp. Derating: possible 

FDU**-003 to FDU**-046 – – 40°C -2.5%/°C to max +10°C 

FDU**-060 to FDU40-073 40°C -2.5%/°C to max +10°C 35°C -2.5%/°C to max +10°C 

FDU48-090 to FDU48-250 




– – 40°C -2.5%/°C to max +5°C 

40°C -2.5%/°C to max +5°C 40°C -2.5%/°C to max +5°C 

Example 

In this example we have a motor with the following data that 

we want to run at the ambient temperature of 45°C: 

Voltage 400 V 

Current 68 A 

Power 37 kW 

Select variable speed drive 

The ambient temperature is 5 °C higher than the maximum 

ambient temperature. The following calculation is made to 

select the correct VSD model. 

Derating is possible with loss in performance of 2.5%/°C. 

Derating will be: 5 X 2.5% = 12.5% 

Calculation for model FDU40-073 

73 A - (12.5% X 73) = 63.875A; this is not enough. 

Calculation for model FDU48-090 

90 A - (12.5% X 90) = 78.75 A 

In this example we select the FDU48-090. 

14.4 Operation at higher 

switching frequency 

Table 45 shows the switching frequency for the different 

VSD models. With the possibility of running at higher 

switching frequency you can reduce the noise level from the 

motor. The switching frequency is set in menu [22A], 

Motor sound, see section section 11.2.3, page 67. At switching 

frequencies >3 kHz derating might be needed. 

Table 45 

Switching frequency 

Models 

Standard 

Switching 

frequency 

Range 

FDU**-003 to FDU**-073 3 kHz 1.5–6 kHz 

FDU**-090 to FDU**-1500 3 kHz 1.5–6 kHz 


14.5 Dimensions and Weights 

The table below gives an overview of the dimensions and 

weights. The models 003 to 250 is available in IP54 as wall 

mounted modules. The models 300 to 1500 consist of 2, 3, 

4 or 6 paralleled power electonic building block (PEBB) 

available in IP20 as wall mounted modules and in IP54 

mounted standard cabinet 

Protection class IP54 is according to the EN 60529 standard. 

Table 46 

Mechanical specifications, FDU40, FDU48, FDU50, FDU52 

Models 

Frame 

size 

Dim. H x W x D [mm] 

IP20 


IP54 

Weight IP20 

[kg] 

Weight IP54 

[kg] 

003 to 018 B – 350(416)x 203 x 200 – 12.5 

026 to 046 C – 440(512) x 178 x 292 – 24 

060 to 073 X2 530(590) x 220 x 270 530(590) x 220 x 270 26 26 

90 to 109 E – 950 x 285 x 314 – 56 

146 to 175 E – 950 x 285 x 314 – 60 

210 to 250 F – 950 x 345 x 314 – 74 

300 to 375 G 1036 x 500 x 390 2330 x 600 x 500 140 270 

430 to 500 H 1036 x 500 x 450 2330 x 600 x 600 170 305 

600 to 750 I 1036 x 730 x 450 2330 x 1000 x 600 248 440 

860 to 1000 J 1036 x 1100 x 450 2330 x 1200 x 600 340 580 

1200 to 1500 K 1036 x 1560 x 450 2330 x 2000 x 600 496 860 

Table 47 

Mechanical specifications, FDU69 

Models 

Frame 

size 


IP20 


IP54 

Weight IP20 

[kg] 

Weight IP54 

[kg] 

90 to 175 F69 – 1090 x 345 x 314 – 77 

210 to 375 H69 1176 x 500 x 450 2330 x 600 x 600 176 311 

430 to 500 I69 1176 x 730 x 450 2330 x 1000 x 600 257 449 

600 to 650 J69 1176 x 1100 x 450 2330 x 1200 x 600 352 592 

750 to 1000 K69 1176 x 1560 x 450 2330 x 2000 x 600 514 878 


14.6 Environmental conditions 

Table 48 

Operation 

Parameter 

Normal operation 

Nominal ambient temperature 

Atmospheric pressure 

0°C–40°C See table, see Table 44 for different conditions 

86–106 kPa 

Relative humidity, non-condensing 0–90% 

Contamination, 

according to IEC 60721-3-3 

Vibrations 

No electrically conductive dust allowed. Cooling air must be clean and free from corrosive 

materials. Chemical gases, class 3C2. Solid particles, class 3S2. 

According to IEC 600068-2-6, Sinusodial vibrations: 

•10

14.7 Fuses, cable crosssections 

and glands 

14.7.1 According IEC ratings 

Use mains fuses of the type gL/gG conforming to IEC 269 

or installation cut-outs with similar characteristics. Check 

the equipment first before installing the glands. 

Max. Fuse = maximum fuse value that still protects the VSD 

and upholds warranty. 

NOTE: The dimensions of fuse and cable cross-section 

are dependent on the application and must be 

determined in accordance with local regulations. 

NOTE: The dimensions of the power terminals used in the 

models 300 to 1500 can differ depending on customer 

specification. 

Table 50 

Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands 

Model 

Nominal 

input 

current 

[A] 

Maximum 

value fuse 

[A] 

Cable cross section connector range [mm 2 ] for 

Cable glands (clamping range 

[mm]) 

mains/ motor Brake PE mains / motor Brake 

FDU**-003 







2.2 

3.5 

5.2 

6.9 

8.7 

11.3 

15.6 

4 

4 

6 

8 

10 

12 

20 

FDU**-026 22 25 




0.5–10 0.5–10 1.5–16 

2.5 - 16 2.5 - 16 6 - 35 

FDU**-060 51 63 4–16 

4–16 

4–16 

FDU**-073 64 80 4–35 4–35 







16 - 95 16 - 95 

35 - 150 16 - 95 

FDU48: 35-240 




M32 opening 

M20 + reducer 

(6–12) 

M25 opening 

M20 + reducer 

(6–12) 

M32 (12–20)/ 

M32 opening 

M25+reducer 

(10-14) M25 (10–14) 

M32 (16–25)/ 

M32 (13–18) 

M32 (15–21) 

M40 (19–28) 

M25 

M32 

M40 (19–28) M40 (27–34) 

16-95 

(16-70)¹ FDU48: Ø30-45 cable entry or 

35-150 

(16-70)¹ 


(95-185)¹ 


(16-70)¹ 

M63 

FDU69: Ø27-66 cable entry 

FDU48: Ø27-66 cable entry 

FDU**-300 260 300 FDU48: (2x)35-240 


FDU69: (2x)35-150 










frame --- -- 

frame -- -- 

frame -- -- 

frame -- -- 


Table 50 

Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands 

Model 

Nominal 

input 

current 

[A] 

Maximum 

value fuse 

[A] 

Cable cross section connector range [mm 2 ] for 

Cable glands (clamping range 

[mm]) 

mains/ motor Brake PE mains / motor Brake 








frame -- -- 

FDU48: (6x)35-240 frame -- -- 

Note: For models 003 to 046 cable glands are optional. 

1. Values are valid when brake chopper electronics are built in. 


14.7.2 Fuses and cable dimensions 

according NEMA ratings 

Table 51 

Types and fuses 

Model 

Input 

current 

[Arms] 

UL 

Class J TD (A) 

Mains input fuses 

Ferraz-Shawmut 

type 

FDU48-003 2,2 6 AJT6 







FDU48-026 22 25 AJT25 
















FDU48-750 648 700 A4BQ700 






Table 52 

Type cables cross-sections and glands 

Cable cross section connector 

Model 

Mains and motor Brake PE 

Range 

Tightening 

torque 

Nm/ft lbf 

Range 

Tightening 

torque 

Nm/ft lbf 

Range 

Tightening 

torque 

Nm/ft lbf 

Cable type 

FDU48-003 





AWG 20 - AWG 6 1.3 / 1 AWG 20 - AWG 6 1.3 / 1 AWG 14 - AWG 6 2.6/2 







AWG 12 - AWG 4 1.3 / 1 AWG 12 - AWG 4 1.3 / 1 AWG 8 - AWG 2 2.6 / 2 


FDU50-060 AWG 12–AWG 4 1.6/1.2 AWG 12–AWG 4 1.6/1.2 AWG 12–AWG 4 1.6/1.2 

Copper (Cu) 

60°C 

output current 

44A: Copper 

(Cu) 75°C 


AWG 4 - AWG 3/0 14 / 10.5 

AWG 4 - AWG 3/0 14 / 10.5 


AWG 4 - AWG 3/0 

(AWG 4 - AWG 2/0)¹ 

14 / 10.5 

(10 / 7.5)¹ 

FDU48-146 AWG 1 - AWG 3/0 

FDU48-175 AWG 4/0 - 300 kcmil 

14 / 10.5 

24 / 18 

AWG 1 - AWG 3/0 

(AWG 4 - AWG 2/0)¹ 

14 / 10.5 

(10 / 7.5)¹ 

FDU48-210 AWG 3/0 - 

FDU48-250 400 kcmil 

24 / 18 

AWG 1 - AWG 3/0 

AWG 4/0 - 300 

kcmil 

14 / 10.5 

24 / 18 

AWG 3/0 - 400 kcmil 

(AWG 4/0 - 400 

kcmil)¹ 

24 / 18 

(10 / 7.5)¹ 

FDU48-300 2 x AWG 4/0 - 

FDU48-375 2 x 300 kcmil 



24 / 18 

24 / 18 

2 x AWG 3/0 - 

2 x 400 kcmil 

2 x AWG 3/0 - 

2 x 400 kcmil 

24 / 18 frame - 

24 / 18 frame - 

Copper (Cu) 

75°C 




3 x AWG 4/0 - 

3 x 300 kcmil 

24 / 18 

2 x AWG 3/0 - 

2 x 400 kcmil 

24 / 18 frame - 



24 / 18 

3 x AWG 3/0 - 

3 x 400 kcmil 

24 / 18 frame - 



24 / 18 

6 x AWG 3/0 - 

6 x 400 kcmil 

24 / 18 frame - 


14.8 Control signals 

Table 53 

Terminal Name: Function (Default): Signal: Type: 

1 +10 V +10 VDC Supply voltage +10 VDC, max 10 mA output 

2 AnIn1 Process reference 

3 AnIn2 Off 

4 AnIn3 Off 

0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 

analogue input 

bipolar: -10 - +10 VDC or -20 - +20 mA 

0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 



0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 



5 AnIn4 Off 

0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 



6 -10 V -10VDC Supply voltage -10 VDC, max 10 mA output 

7 Common Signal ground 0V output 

8 DigIn 1 RunL 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

9 DigIn 2 RunR 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

10 DigIn 3 Off 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

11 +24 V +24VDC Supply voltage +24 VDC, 100 mA output 

12 Common Signal ground 0 V output 

13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed 0 ±10 VDC or 0/4– +20 mA analogue output 

14 AnOut 2 0 to max torque 0 ±10 VDC or 0/4– +20 mA analogue output 

15 Common Signal ground 0 V output 





20 DigOut 1 Ready 24 VDC, 100 mA digital output 

21 DigOut 2 No trip 24 VDC, 100 mA digital output 

22 DigIn 8 RESET 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

Terminal X2 

31 N/C 1 Relay 1 output 

32 COM 1 

33 N/O 1 

Trip, active when the 

VSD is in a TRIP condition 

N/C is opened when the relay is active 

(valid for all relays) 

N/O is closed when the relay is active 

(valid for all relays) 

potential free change over 

0.1 – 2 A/U max 250 VAC or 42 VDC 

relay output 

Terminal X3 

41 N/C 2 

42 COM 2 

43 N/O 2 

Relay 2 Output 

Run, active when the 

VSD is started 



relay output 

51 COM 3 Relay 3 Output 

52 N/O 3 Off 



relay output 



15. Menu List 

DEFAULT 

100 Preferred View 

110 1st Line Process Val 

120 2nd Line Current 

200 Main Setup 

210 Operation 

211 Language English 

212 Select Motor M1 

213 Drive Mode V/Hz 

214 Ref Control Remote 

215 Run/Stp Ctrl Remote 

216 Reset Ctrl Remote 

217 Local/Rem Off 

2171 LocRefCtrl Standard 

2172 LocRunCtrl Standard 

218 Lock Code? 0 

219 Rotation R+L 

21A Level/Edge Level 

21B Supply Volts Not Defined 

220 Motor Data 

221 Motor Volts U NOM V 

222 Motor Freq 50Hz 

223 Motor Power (P NOM ) W 

224 Motor Curr (I NOM ) A 

225 Motor Speed (n MOT ) rpm 

226 Motor Poles - 

227 Motor Cosϕ Depends on P nom 

228 Motor Vent Self 

229 Motor ID-Run Off 

22A Motor Sound F 

22B Encoder Off 

22C Enc Pulses 1024 

22D Enc Speed 0rpm 

230 Mot Protect 

231 Mot I 2 t Type Trip 

232 Mot I 2 t Curr 100% 

233 Mot I 2 t Time 60s 

234 Thermal Prot Off 

235 Motor Class F 140°C 

236 PT100 Inputs 

237 Motor PTC Off 

240 Set Handling 

241 Select Set A 

242 Copy Set A>B 

243 Default>Set A 

244 Copy to CP No Copy 

245 Load from CP No Copy 

250 Autoreset 

251 No of Trips 0 

252 Overtemp Off 

253 Overvolt D Off 

254 Overvolt G Off 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

255 Overvolt Off 

256 Motor Lost Off 

257 Locked Rotor Off 

258 Power Fault Off 

259 Undervoltage Off 

25A Motor I 2 t Off 

25B Motor I 2 t TT Trip 

25C PT100 Off 

25D PT100 TT Trip 

25E PTC Off 

25F PTC TT Trip 

25G Ext Trip Off 

25H Ext Trip TT Trip 

25I Com Error Off 

25J Com Error TT Trip 

25K Min Alarm Off 

25L Min Alarm TT Trip 

25M Max Alarm Off 

25N Max Alarm TT Trip 

25O Over curr F Off 

25P Pump Off 

25Q Over speed Off 

25R Ext Mot Temp Off 

25S Ext Mot TT Trip 

25T LC Level Off 

25U LC Level TT Trip 

260 Serial Com 

261 Com Type RS232/485 

262 RS232/485 

2621 Baudrate 9600 

2622 Address 1 

263 Fieldbus 

2631 Address 62 

2632 PrData Mode Basic 

2633 Read/Write RW 

2634 AddPrValue 0 

264 Comm Fault 

2641 ComFlt Mode Off 

2642 ComFlt Time 0.5 s 

265 Ethernet 

2651 IP Address 0.0.0.0 

2652 MAC Address 000000000000 

2653 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 

2654 Gateway 0.0.0.0 

2655 DHCP Off 

266 FB Signal 









CUSTOM 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 Menu List 177

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 


363 Preset Ref 2 250 rpm 

266A FB Signal 10 


266B FB Signal 11 


266C FB Signal 12 


266D FB Signal 13 


266E FB Signal 14 


266F FB Signal 15 

369 Keyb Ref Normal 

266G FB Signal 16 

380 ProcCtrlPID 

269 FB Status 

381 PID Control Off 

300 Process 

383 PID P Gain 1.0 

310 Set/View ref 

384 PID I Time 1.00s 

320 Proc Setting 

385 PID D Time 0.00s 

321 Proc Source Speed 

386 PIDMin Spd 10.00s 

399 Start Delay 0s 

336 Dec

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

4161 MaxAlarmMar 15% 

5169 AnIn2 Filt 0.1s 

4162 MaxAlarmDel 0.1s 

516A AnIn2 Enabl On 

417 Max Pre alarm 

517 AnIn3 Fc Off 

4171 MaxPreAlMar 10% 

518 AnIn3 Setup 4-20mA 

4172 MaxPreAlDel 0.1s 


418 Min Pre Alarm 

5191 AnIn3 Min 4mA 

4181 MinPreAlMar 10% 

5192 AnIn3 Max 20.00mA 

4182 MinPreAlDel 0.1s 

5193 AnIn3 Bipol 20.00mA 

419 Min Alarm 

5194 AnIn3 FcMin Min 

4191 MinAlarmMar 15% 

5195 AnIn3 ValMin 0 

4192 MinAlarmDel 0.1s 

5196 AnIn3 FcMax Max 

41A Autoset Alrm No 

5197 AnIn3 ValMax 0 

41B Normal Load 100% 

5198 AnIn3 Oper Add+ 

41C 

Load Curve 


41C1 Load Curve 1 100% 



51A AnIn4 Fc Off 


51B AnIn4 Setup 4-20mA 


51C 

AnIn4 Advan 


51C1 AnIn4 Min 4mA 


51C2 AnIn4 Max 20.00mA 


51C3 AnIn4 Bipol 20.00mA 


51C4 AnIn4 FcMin Min 


51C5 AnIn4 ValMin 0 

420 Process Prot 

51C6 AnIn4 FcMax Max 

421 Low Volt OR On 

51C7 AnIn4 ValMax 0 

422 Rotor Locked Off 

51C8 AnIn4 Oper Add+ 

423 Motor lost Off 

51C9 AnIn4 Filt 0.1s 

424 Overvolt Ctrl On 

51CA AnIn4 Enabl On 

500 I/Os 

520 Dig Inputs 

510 An Inputs 

521 DigIn 1 RunL 

511 AnIn1 Fc Process Ref 

522 DigIn 2 RunR 



513 AnIn1 Advn 




5132 AnIn1 Max 20.00mA 





528 DigIn 8 Reset 


529 B(oard)1 DigIn 1 Off 


52A B(oard)1 DigIn 2 Off 


52B B(oard)1 DigIn 3 Off 


52C B(oard)2 DigIn 1 Off 


52D B(oard)2 DigIn 2 Off 


52E B(oard)2 DigIn 3 Off 

514 AnIn2 Fc Off 

52F B(oard)3 DigIn 1 Off 


52G B(oard)3 DigIn 2 Off 


52H B(oard)3 DigIn 3 Off 


530 An Outputs 

5162 AnIn2 Max 20.00mA 

531 AnOut1 Fc Speed 


532 AnOut1 Setup 4-20mA 


533 AnOut1 Adv 


5331 AnOut 1 Min 4mA 


5332 AnOut 1 Max 20.0mA 


5333 AnOut1Bipol -10.00-10.00 V 


5334 AnOut1 FcMin Min 


DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

5335 AnOut1 VlMin 0 

56C VIO 6 Source Off 

5336 AnOut1 FcMax Max 

56D VIO 7 Dest Off 

5337 AnOut1 VlMax 0 

56E VIO 7 Source Off 

534 AnOut2 FC Torque 

56F VIO 8 Dest Off 

535 AnOut2 Setup 4-20mA 

56G VIO 8 Source Off 

536 AnOut2 Advan 

600 Logical&Timers 

5361 AnOut 2 Min 4mA 

610 Comparators 

5362 AnOut 2 Max 20.0mA 

611 CA1 Value Speed 

5363 AnOut2Bipol -10.00-10.00 V 

612 CA1 Level HI 300rpm 

5364 AnOut2 FcMin Min 

613 CA1 Level LO 200rpm 

5365 AnOut2 VlMin 0 

614 CA2 Value Torque 

5366 AnOut2 FcMax Max 

615 CA2 Level HI 20% 

5367 AnOut2 VlMax 0 

616 CA2 Level LO 10% 

540 Dig Outputs 

617 CD1 Run 

541 DigOut 1 Ready 

618 CD2 DigIn 1 

542 DigOut 2 No Trip 

620 Logic Output Y 

550 Relays 

621 Y Comp 1 CA1 

551 Relay 1 Trip 

622 Y Operator 1 & 

552 Relay 2 Run 

623 Y Comp 2 !A2 

553 Relay 3 Off 

624 Y Operator 2 & 

554 B(oard)1 Relay 1 Off 

625 Y Comp 3 CD1 


630 Logic Z 


631 Z Comp 1 CA1 


632 Z Operator 1 & 


633 Z Comp2 !A2 


634 Z Operator 2 & 

55A B(oard)3 Relay 1 Off 

635 Z Comp 3 CD1 

55B B(oard)3 Relay 2 Off 

640 Timer1 

55C B(oard)3 Relay 3 Off 

641 Timer1 Trig Off 

55D 

Relay Adv 

642 Timer1 Mode Off 

55D1 Relay 1 Mode N.O 

643 Timer1 Delay 0:00:00 


644 Timer 1 T1 0:00:00 


645 Timer1 T2 0:00:00 

55D4 B1R1 Mode N.O 

649 Timer1 Value 0:00:00 


650 Timer2 


651 Timer2 Trig Off 


652 Timer2 Mode Off 


653 Timer2 Delay 0:00:00 


654 Timer 2 T1 0:00:00 

55DA B3R1 Mode N.O 

655 Timer2 T2 0:00:00 

55DB B3R2 Mode N.O 

659 Tmer2 Value 0:00:00 

55DC B3R3 Mode N.O 

700 Oper/Status 

560 Virtual I/Os 

710 Operation 

561 VIO 1 Dest Off 

711 Process Val 

562 VIO 1 Source Off 



713 Torque 




715 Electrical Power 


716 Current 


717 Output volt 


718 Frequency 


719 DC Voltage 

56A VIO 5 Source Off 

71A 

Heatsink Tmp 

56B VIO 6 Dest Off 

71B 

PT100_1_2_3 

180 Menu List Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

720 Status 

721 VSD Status 

722 Warning 

723 DigIn Status 

724 DigOut Status 

725 AnIn Status 1-2 

726 AnIn Status 3-4 

727 AnOut Status 1-2 

728 IO Status B1 

729 IO Status B2 

72A IO Status B3 

730 Stored Val 

731 Run Time 00:00:00 

7311 Reset RunTm No 

732 Mains Time 00:00:00 

733 Energy kWh 

7331 Rst Energy No 

800 View TripLog 

810 Trip Message 

811 Process Value 


813 Torque 



816 Current 

817 Output voltage 

818 Frequency 

819 DC Link voltage 


81B PT100_1, 2, 3 

81C FI Status 

81D DigIn status 

81E DigOut status 

81F AnIn status 1 2 

81G AnIn status 3 4 

81H AnOut status 1 2 

81I IO Status B1 

81J IO Status B2 

81K IO Status B3 

81L Run Time 

81M Mains Time 

81N Energy 

820 Trip Message 



823 Torque 



826 Current 


828 Frequency 



82B PT100_1, 2, 3 

830 

840 

82C FI Status 









82L Run Time 


82N Energy 



833 Torque 



836 Current 


838 Frequency 


83A Heatsink Temperature 

83B PT100_1, 2, 3 

83C FI Status 




83G AIn status 3 4 





83L Run Time 


83N Energy 



843 Torque 



846 Current 


848 Frequency 



84B PT100_1, 2, 3 

84C FI Status 







DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

84I 

IO Status B1 

870 

84J 

IO Status B2 


84K 

IO Status B3 


84L 

Run Time 

873 Torque 

84M 

Mains Time 


84N 

Energy 


850 

876 Current 




878 Frequency 

853 Torque 



87A 

Heatsink Tmpe 


87B PT100_1, 2, 3 

856 Current 

87C 

FI Status 


87D 

DigIn status 

858 Frequency 

87E 

DigOut status 



85A 

Heatsink Tmp 


85B PT100_1, 2, 3 


85C 

FI Status 

87I 

IO Status B1 

85D 

DigIn status 

87J 

IO Status B2 

85E 

DigOut status 

87K 

IO Status B3 

85F AnIn 1 2 

87L 

Run Time 

85G AnIn 3 4 

87M 

Mains Time 

85H AnIOut 1 2 

87N 

Energy 

85I 

IO Status B1 

880 

85J 

IO Status B2 


85K 

IO Status B3 


85L 

Run Time 

818 Torque 

85M 

Mains Time 


85N 

Energy 


860 

886 Current 




888 Frequency 

863 Torque 



88A 

Heatsink Tmp 


88B PT100_1, 2, 3 

866 Current 

88C 

FI Status 


88D 

DigIn status 

868 Frequency 

88E 

DigOut status 



86A 

Heatsink Tmp 


86B PT100_1, 2, 3 


86C 

FI Status 

88I 

IO Status B1 

86D 

DigIn status 

88J 

IO Status B2 

86E 

DigOut status 

88K 

IO Status B3 

86F AnIn 1 2 

88L 

Run Time 

86G AnIn 3 4 

88M 

Mains Time 

86H AnOut 1 2 

88N 

Energy 

86I 

IO Status B1 

890 

86J IO Status B 2 


86K 

IO Status B3 


86L 

Run Time 

893 Torque 

86M 

Mains Time 


86N 

Energy 



DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

896 Current 


898 Frequency 



89B PT100_1, 2, 3 

89C FI Status 









89L Run Time 


89N Energy 

8A0 Reset Trip No 

900 System Data 

920 VSD Data 

921 VSD Type 

922 Software 

923 Unit name 0 



Index 

Symbols 

+10VDC Supply voltage ................175 

+24VDC Supply voltage ................175 

Numerics 

-10VDC Supply voltage .................175 

4-20mA .........................................117 

A 

Abbreviations .....................................8 

Acceleration ...............................90, 92 

Acceleration ramp .....................92 

Acceleration time ......................90 

Ramp type ................................92 

Alarm trip ......................................110 

Alternating MASTER ..41, 44, 45, 104 

Ambient temperature and derating 168 

Analogue comparators ...................131 

Analogue input ..............................115 

AnIn1 .....................................115 

AnIn2 .............................120, 121 

Offset .............................117, 124 

Analogue Output ...........124, 126, 175 

AnOut 1 .........................124, 126 

Output configuration .....124, 127 

AND operator ...............................135 

AnIn2 ............................................121 

AnIn3 ............................................121 

AnIn4 ............................................122 

Autoreset .......................1, 36, 76, 152 

B 

Baudrate ..............................55, 83, 84 

Brake chopper ................................157 

Brake function ...........................93, 94 

Bake release time ......................93 

Brake ........................................95 

Brake Engage Time ..................95 

Brake wait time ........................95 

Release speed ............................95 

Vector Brake .............................95 

Brake functions 

Frequency ...............................115 

Brake resistors ................................157 

C 

Cable cross-section .........................171 

Cable specifications ..........................19 

Cascade controller ............................40 

CE-marking .......................................7 

Change Condition .........................105 

Change Timer ...............................105 

Checklist ..........................................45 

Clockwise rotary field ....................122 

Comparators ..................................131 

Connecting control signals ...............24 

Connections 

Brake chopper connections .......15 

Control signal connections ........24 

Mains supply ......................15, 27 

Motor earth ........................15, 27 

Motor output ......................15, 27 

Safety earth .........................15, 27 

Control panel ...................................51 

Control Panel memory .....................37 

Copy all settings to Control Panel . 

75 

Frequency ...............................115 

Control signal connections ...............24 

Control signals ...........................22, 25 

Edge-controlled ..................36, 67 

Level-controlled ..................36, 67 

Counter-clockwise rotary field .......122 

Current ............................................22 

Current control (0-20mA) ...............26 

D 

DC-link residual voltage ....................2 

Deceleration .....................................90 

Deceleration time .....................90 

Ramp type ................................92 

Declaration of Conformity .................7 

Default .............................................75 

Definitions .........................................8 

Derating .........................................168 

Digital comparators ........................131 

Digital inputs 

Board Relay ............................129 

DigIn 1 ...................................122 

DigIn 2 ...................................123 

DigIn 3 ...................................123 

Dismantling and scrapping ................7 

Display .............................................51 

Double-ended connection ................25 

Drive mode ......................................64 

Frequency ...............................115 

Drives on Change ..........................105 

E 

ECP ...............................................157 

Edge control ...............................36, 67 

Electrical specification ....................167 

EMC ................................................16 

Current control (0-20mA) ........26 

Double-ended connection .........25 

RFI mains filter .........................16 

Single-ended connection ...........25 

Twisted cables ...........................26 

Emergency stop ................................49 

EN60204-1 ........................................7 

EN61800-3 ........................................7 

EN61800-5-1 ....................................7 

Enable ................................35, 52, 122 

EXOR operator ............................. 135 

Expression ..................................... 135 

External Control Panel .................. 157 

F 

Factory settings ................................ 75 

Fail safe ........................................... 42 

Fans ............................................... 104 

Feedback 'Status' input .................... 41 

Fieldbus ................................... 83, 159 

Fixed MASTER ....................... 45, 104 

Flux optimization ............................ 99 

Frequency ...................................... 141 

Frequency priority .................... 34 

Jog Frequency .......................... 97 

Maximum Frequency ............... 96 

Minimum Frequency ............... 95 

Preset Frequency .................... 100 

Skip Frequency .................. 96, 97 

Frequency priority ........................... 34 

Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands .. 

171 

G 

General electrical specifications ..... 167 

H 

Hydrophore controller .................... 40 

I 

I/O Board ...................................... 159 

I/O board option ............................. 40 

I2t protection 

Motor I2t Current ............. 72, 73 

Motor I2t Type ........................ 71 

ID run ............................................. 70 

Identification Run ..................... 37, 70 

IEC269 ......................................... 171 

Interrupt ................................... 84, 85 

IT Mains supply ................................ 2 

IxR Compensation .......................... 98 

J 

Jog Frequency ................................. 97 

K 

Keyboard reference ........................ 100 

Keys ................................................ 52 

- Key ........................................ 54 

+ Key ....................................... 54 

Control keys ............................. 52 

ENTER key ............................. 54 

ESCAPE key ............................ 54 

Function keys ........................... 54 

NEXT key ................................ 54 

PREVIOUS key ....................... 54 


RUN L .....................................52 

RUN R .....................................52 

STOP/RESET ..........................52 

Toggle Key ...............................52 

L 

LCD display ....................................51 

Level control ..............................36, 67 

Load default .....................................75 

Load monitor ...........................38, 110 

Local/Remote ..................................65 

Lock code ........................................66 

Long motor cables ...........................17 

Low Voltage Directive .......................7 

Lower Band ...................................106 

Lower Band Limit ..........................107 

M 

Machine Directive .............................7 

Main menu ......................................54 

Mains supply .......................15, 21, 27 

Maintenance ..................................155 

Manis cables ....................................15 

Manufacturer’s certificate ...................7 

Max Frequency ..........................90, 96 

Memory ...........................................37 

Menu 

(110) ........................................63 

(120) ........................................64 

(210) ........................................64 

(211) ........................................64 

(212) ........................................64 

(213) ........................................64 

(214) ........................................65 

(215) ........................................65 

(216) ........................................65 

(217) ........................................65 

(218) ........................................66 

(219) ........................................66 

(21A) ........................................67 

(21B) ........................................67 

(220) ........................................67 

(221) ........................................68 

(222) ........................................68 

(223) ........................................68 

(224) ........................................68 

(225) ........................................69 

(226) ........................................69 

(227) ........................................69 

(228) ........................................69 

(229) ........................................70 

(22A) ........................................70 

(22B) ........................................70 

(22C) ........................................71 

(22D) .......................................71 

(230) ........................................71 

(231) ........................................71 

(232) ........................................72 

(233) ........................................72 

(234) ........................................73 

(235) .........................................73 

(236) .........................................73 

(237) .........................................74 

(240) .........................................74 

(241) .........................................74 

(242) .........................................75 

(243) .........................................75 

(244) .........................................75 

(245) .........................................76 

(250) .........................................76 

(251) .........................................76 

(252) .........................................77 

(253) .........................................77 

(254) .........................................77 

(255) .........................................78 

(256) .........................................78 

(257) .........................................78 

(258) .........................................78 

(259) .........................................78 

(25A) ........................................79 

(25B) ........................................79 

(25C) ........................................79 

(25D) ........................................79 

(25E) ........................................79 

(25F) ........................................80 

(25G) ........................................80 

(25H) .......................................80 

(25I) .........................................80 

(25J) .........................................80 

(25K) ........................................80 

(25L) ........................................81 

(25M) .......................................81 

(25N) .................................76, 81 

(25O) .......................................81 

(25P) ........................................81 

(25Q) .......................................82 

(25R) ........................................82 

(25S) .........................................82 

(25T) ........................................82 

(25U) ........................................82 

(260) .........................................82 

(261) .........................................83 

(262) .........................................83 

(2621) .......................................83 

(2622) .......................................83 

(263) .........................................83 

(2631) .......................................83 

(2632) .......................................83 

(2633) .......................................83 

(2634) .......................................84 

(264) .........................................84 

(265) .........................................84 

(269) .........................................85 

(310) .........................................85 

(320) .........................................86 

(321) .........................................86 

(322) .........................................87 

(323) .........................................87 

(324) .........................................88 

(325) .........................................88 

(326) ........................................ 88 

(327) ........................................ 89 

(328) ........................................ 89 

(331) ........................................ 90 

(332) ........................................ 90 

(333) ........................................ 91 

(334) ........................................ 91 

(335) ........................................ 91 

(336) ........................................ 91 

(337) ........................................ 92 

(338) ........................................ 92 

(339) ........................................ 93 

(33A) ....................................... 93 

(33B) ........................................ 93 

(33C) ....................................... 93 

(33D) ....................................... 95 

(33E) ........................................ 95 

(33F) ........................................ 95 

(33G) ....................................... 95 

(341) ........................................ 95 

(342) ........................................ 96 

(343) ........................................ 96 

(344) ........................................ 96 

(345) ........................................ 97 

(346) ........................................ 97 

(347) ........................................ 97 

(348) ........................................ 97 

(351) ........................................ 98 

(354) ........................................ 99 

(361) ........................................ 99 

(362) ...................................... 100 

(363) ...................................... 100 

(364) ...................................... 100 

(365) ...................................... 100 

(366) ...................................... 100 

(367) ...................................... 100 

(368) ...................................... 100 

(369) ...................................... 100 

(380) ...................................... 100 

(381) ...................................... 101 

(383) ...................................... 101 

(384) ...................................... 101 

(385) ...................................... 101 

(386) ...................................... 102 

(387) ...................................... 102 

(388) ...................................... 102 

(389) ...................................... 103 

(391) ...................................... 104 

(392) ...................................... 104 

(393) ...................................... 104 

(394) ...................................... 105 

(395) ...................................... 105 

(396) ...................................... 105 

(398) ...................................... 106 

(399) ...................................... 106 

(39A) ..................................... 107 

(39B) ...................................... 107 

(39C) ..................................... 107 

(39D) ..................................... 107 

(39E) ...................................... 108 


(39F) ......................................108 

(39G) .....................................109 

(39H-39M) ............................109 

(410) ......................................110 

(411) ......................................110 

(412) ......................................110 

(413) ......................................110 

(414) ......................................110 

(415) ......................................110 

(416) ......................................111 

(4162) ....................................111 

(417) ......................................111 

(4171) ....................................111 

(4172) ....................................112 

(418) ......................................112 

(4181) ....................................112 

(4182) ....................................112 

(419) ......................................112 

(4191) ....................................112 

(4192) ....................................113 

(41A) ......................................113 

(41B) ......................................113 

(41C) ......................................113 

(421) ......................................114 

(422) ......................................114 

(423) ......................................115 

(424) ......................................115 

(511) ......................................115 

(512) ......................................116 

(513) ......................................118 

(514) ......................................120 

(515) ......................................121 

(516) ......................................121 

(517) ......................................121 

(518) ......................................121 

(519) ......................................121 

(51A) ......................................121 

(51B) ......................................122 

(51C) ......................................122 

(521) ......................................122 

(522) ......................................123 

(529-52H) ..............................123 

(531) ......................................124 

(532) ......................................124 

(533) ......................................125 

(534) ......................................126 

(535) ......................................127 

(536) ......................................127 

(541) ......................................127 

(542) ......................................129 

(551) ......................................129 

(552) ......................................129 

(553) ......................................129 

(55D) .....................................130 

(561) ......................................130 

(562) ......................................131 

(563-56G) ..............................131 

(610) ......................................131 

(611) ......................................131 

(612) ......................................133 

(613) .......................................134 

(614) .......................................134 

(615) .......................................134 

(616) .......................................134 

(617) .......................................135 

(618) .......................................135 

(620) .......................................135 

(621) ...............................135, 136 

(622) .......................................136 

(623) .......................................136 

(624) .......................................136 

(625) .......................................136 

(630) .......................................137 

(631) .......................................137 

(632) .......................................137 

(633) .......................................137 

(634) .......................................138 

(635) .......................................138 

(640) .......................................138 

(641) .......................................138 

(642) .......................................138 

(643) .......................................139 

(644) .......................................139 

(645) .......................................139 

(649) .......................................139 

(650) .......................................140 

(651) .......................................140 

(652) .......................................140 

(653) .......................................140 

(654) .......................................140 

(655) .......................................140 

(659) .......................................141 

(711) .......................................141 

(712) .......................................141 

(713) .......................................141 

(714) .......................................141 

(715) .......................................142 

(716) .......................................142 

(717) .......................................142 

(718) .......................................142 

(719) .......................................142 

(71A) ......................................142 

(71B) ......................................143 

(720) .......................................143 

(721) .......................................143 

(722) .......................................143 

(723) .......................................144 

(724) .......................................144 

(725) .......................................145 

(726) .......................................145 

(727) .......................................145 

(728-72A) ...............................146 

(730) .......................................146 

(731) .......................................146 

(7311) .....................................146 

(732) .......................................146 

(733) .......................................147 

(7331) .....................................147 

(800) .......................................147 

(810) .......................................147 

(811) ...................................... 147 

(811-81N) ...................... 147, 148 

(820) ...................................... 148 

(8A0) ..................................... 149 

(900) ...................................... 149 

(920) ...................................... 149 

(922) ...................................... 149 

Minimum Frequency ................ 91, 96 

Monitor function 

Alarm Select ........................... 113 

Delay time ............................. 110 

Max Alarm ............................. 110 

Overload .......................... 38, 110 

Response delay ............... 111, 113 

Start delay .............................. 110 

Motor cables .................................... 16 

Motor cos phi (power factor) ........... 69 

Motor data ...................................... 67 

Motor frequency ............................. 69 

Motor I2t Current ......................... 153 

Motor identification run ................. 70 

Motor Potentiometer .............. 99, 122 

Motor potentiometer ..................... 122 

Motor ventilation ............................ 69 

Motors .............................................. 5 

Motors in parallel ............................ 20 

MotPot ............................................ 91 

Multi-motor application .................. 64 

N 

Nominal motor frequency ............... 96 

Number of drives .......................... 104 

O 

Operation ........................................ 64 

Options ................................... 26, 157 

Brake chopper ........................ 157 

External Control Panel (ECP) 157 

I/O Board .............................. 159 

Output coils ........................... 159 

Protection class IP23 and IP54 ..... 

157 

Serial communication, fieldbus .... 

159 

OR operator .................................. 135 

Output coils .................................. 159 

Overload ................................. 38, 110 

Overload alarm ................................ 38 

P 

Parameter sets 

Load default values ................... 75 

Load parameter sets from Control 

Panel ........................................ 76 

Parameter Set Selection ............ 33 

Select a Parameter set ............... 74 

PID control ..................................... 43 

PID Controller .............................. 100 

Closed loop PID control ........ 101 

Feedback signal ...................... 100 


PID D Time ...........................101 

PID I Time ............................101 

PID P Gain ............................101 

Power LED ......................................52 

Priority ............................................34 

Process Value .................................141 

Product standard, EMC .....................6 

Programming ...................................55 

Protection class IP23 and IP54 ......157 

PT100 Inputs ............................73, 74 

PTC input .......................................73 

Pump size ........................................45 

Pump/Fan Control ........................104 

Q 

Quick Setup Card ..............................5 

R 

Reference 

Frequency ...............................114 

Motor potentiometer ..............122 

Reference signal ..................64, 85 

Set reference value ....................85 

Torque ...................................114 

View reference value .................85 

Reference control .............................65 

Reference signal ...............................65 

Relay output ..................................129 

Relay 1 ...................................129 

Relay 2 ...................................129 

Relay 3 ...................................129 

Release speed ...................................95 

Remote control ................................35 

Reset command .............................122 

Reset control ....................................65 

Resolution .......................................63 

RFI mains filter ...............................16 

Rotation ..........................................66 

RS232/485 ......................................83 

RUN ...............................................52 

Run command .................................52 

Run Left command ........................122 

Run Right command .....................122 

Running motor ................................93 

Stop categories .................................49 

Stop command ...............................122 

Stop Delay .....................................107 

Stripping lengths ..............................19 

Switches ...........................................22 

Switching frequency .........................70 

Switching in motor cables ................17 

T 

Technical Data ...............................163 

Terminal connections ......................22 

Test Run ..........................................70 

Timer .............................................105 

Torque .............................................98 

Transition Frequency .....................108 

Trip .................................................52 

Trip causes and remidial action ......152 

Trips, warnings and limits ..............151 

Twisted cables ..................................26 

Type ..............................................149 

Type code number .............................5 

U 

Underload ........................................38 

Underload alarm ............................110 

Unlock Code ...................................66 

Upper Band ...................................106 

Menu 

(397) 106 

Upper Band Limit ..........................107 

V 

V/Hz Mode .....................................64 

Vector Brake ....................................95 

Ventilation .......................................69 

View reference value .........................85 

Voltage .............................................22 

W 

Warning .........................................147 

Wiring .............................................44 

S 

Select Drive ...................................104 

Settle Time ....................................107 

Setup menu .....................................54 

Menu structure .........................54 

Signal ground ................................175 

Single-ended connection ..................25 

Software .........................................149 

Sound characteristic .........................70 

Speed .............................................141 

Spinstart ..........................................93 

Standards ...........................................6 

Start Delay .....................................106 

Start/Stop settings ............................90 

Status indications .............................51 


Emotron AB, Mörsaregatan 12, SE-250 24 Helsingborg, Sweden 

Tel: +46 42 16 99 00, Fax: +46 42 16 99 49 

E-mail: info@emotron.se 

Internet: www.emotron.com 

Emotron AB 01-4428-01r2 2009-05-15

Emotron FDU 2.0 Variable Speed Drive

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?